Home

Roland ATELIER AT-500 User's Manual

1. EAM Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type 126 There are 18 different Harmony types The manner in which notes will sound also depends on the Harmony type When you press the Harmony Intelligence button to turn it on lit a voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically Press the Harmony Intelligence button The Harmony Intelligence screen appears for several seconds Harmony Intelligence BIG BAND HARP STRINGS COMBO BLOCK JAZZ SCAT COUNTRY a Touch lt g lt La gt to switch the screen and touch the screen to select the desired harmony intelligence The indicator of the Harmony Intelligence Harmony Intelligence button will blink Type of Harmony Intelligence BIG BAND STRINGS BLOCK TRADITIONAL HARP COMBO JAZZ SCAT COUNTRY BROADWAY OCTAVE 1 OCTAVE 2 1 NOTE 3 NOTES BIG BAND STRINGS BLOCK JAZZ SCAT BROADWAY on M EMO You can also confirm the Press the Harmony Intelligence button once again A E The Harmony Intelligence button indicator will light indicating that the by touching lt Exit gt on the i Harmony Intelligence screen selected harmony intelligence has been confirmed oe You can also play the upper manual to confirm the type of the Harmony Intelligence Applying Various Effects to the Sound stim The way in which the keys yo
2. Se Selecting and laying Sounds Performing with an Active Expression Voice For Active Expression Voices operating the expression pedal will control not only the volume but also the tone or may add additional sounds n M EMO For details on the active 1 Touch the Others button of the Part to which you want to sores oaueiceailaiicts assign an Active Expression voice available refer to Voice list ikas LF Appendix separate booklet The Others Voice screens appears Active Expression voices can be PR peiese assigned to the Others buttons of the Upper Orchestral part Lower Orchestral part Pedal and Solo part 2 Touch a button that shows a sound group Although you can select an A sub window appears allowing you to select a sound group Active Expression voice with the Others button for parts other 3 In the sub window touch lt AEx Voice gt Active Expression than Lower Orchestral Upper Orchestral Pedal and Solo no Voice Active Expression effect is applied The s aa il Active Expression icon does not appear when an Active spunos ul ejq pue Hunoajas Expression voice is selected for a part for which the Active Expression effect is not being used Percussion The indicator ot the selected Others Suton will blink The Others Voice Others Voice Select screen appears and only the Active Expression Voices from the entire collection are displa
3. LEFT or RIGHT Load Next the foot switch will function only to switch Registrations p 122 MEMO The Glide effect will only be applied to the keyboard section that has been specified as being the destination for the Pitch bend Vibrato lever Please refer to Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply p 200 stmt Changing the Function of the Foot Switch You can select any of the following functions and assign them to either Foot Switch on the right or left side of the Expression Pedal 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears amma P gt lt B gt to display the L Foot Switch 3 Touch lt q or R Foot Switch Holaiidol cig L Foot Switch R Foot Switch Registration Shift Damper Pedal Jj 4 Touch lt L Foot Switch gt or lt R Foot Switch gt setting ejanude lisia L Foot Switch SSS 5 J ft 5 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 6 Touch lt Exit gt If the Registration Shift setting is RIGHT LEFT or RIGHT Load next the Foot Switch will be dedicated to switching through the Registrations and the R Foot Switch or L Foot Switch setting will be ignored p 122 Using the Performance Functions Available functions ROTARY FAST
4. Screen Setting Controller screen Exp Curve Expression Curve Controller screen Bender Vibrato SI IND HOUS Upper Keyboard screen Split Point screen Pedalboard screen Pedal Bass Mode Controller screen L Foot Switch Left Foot Switch R Foot Switch Right Foot Switch Controller screen Damper Pedal Split Point screen Pedalboard screen Sustain Length Effect screen Rotary Color Effect screen Rotary Speed Rhythm Options screen Count Down Sound Upper Keyboard screen Lower Keyboard screen Pedalboard screen Registration Options screen Arranger Update Factory Reset screen Panel Reset screen Song Clear screen If the performance data has never been saved to a USB memory or Favorites the Song Clear screen appears 257 Main Specifications AT 500 MUSIC ATELIER 49 keys C3 C7 64 keys Waterfall keyboard A1 C7 Keyboard 20 keys C2 63 Upper Lower 10 levels for each Conforms to GENERAL MIDI Level 2 GENERAL MIDI System GS and XGlite format 250 Voices Included 12 Active Expression Voices Sound Generator Organ Orchestral Organ Orchestral Flute with harmonic bars 195 Rhythms in 10 groups x 4 variations Rhythm 99 Rhythms Pattern editing of the internal Rhythms Drum Set Beat Tempo Note Tempo Arranger On Off Start Stop Sync Start Intro Ending Intro Count Down Break Auto Fill In Arranger Function Variation 4 variations One Touch Program Chord Intelligence Chord H
5. 116 Copying Registration from USB Memory to User Memory 1 Connect the USB memory to the External Memory NEMO connector If you want to copy Registration from floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext 2 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen Drive connector The Registration Load screen appears MEMO You can also open the MA Registration Load l Registration Load screen by pressing the Registration button on the panel 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 _ 02 REGIST 02 3 Touch lt file gt The Registration File Edit screen appears 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 OS REGIS T05 114 A Using the Registration Buttons Ea Touch lt Copy gt The Registration File Copy screen appears MA Registration File Copy a gt lem we Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media the location of the Registration you want to copy If you want to copy a Registration from USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to copy a Registration from floppy disk select Disk Touch lt 0 lt to select the Registration you want to copy BA Registration File Copy OG E O1 REGIST O1 wes Touch User lt 0 lt to select the copy destination number Numbers for which a Registration name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them Touch lt Execute gt The copying of the Registration to User memory
6. Lower J Lower organ2 A 3 Touch lt Pedal gt 149 Aago pueoghsy 1 m07 y Huis a Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively 4 Touch lt g lt J to display the Bass Split Pedalboard Prei Organ Bass jf rece S 9 Touch the Bass Split setting to switch between ON and OFF n Each time you touch the Bass Split setting it will alternate ON OFF When you play the Lower keyboard the Pedal Bass voice will sound in the range to the left of and including the C3 note i Bass voice Lower keyboard Tv TTT TT Bass KA Point 6 Touch lt Exit gt 150 ETA It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal To Lower buttons p 152 simultaneously M EMO The bass split point is included in the left hand area of the keyboard If the Bass Split is ON the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard The Pedal Bass voice will sound from the Lower keyboard strane Using the Lower Keybord fete Changing the Bass Split Point 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to modify the Bass Split Point You can assign the Bass Split Point the highest key up to which the Pedal Bass voice will sound to any key of the Setting Lower keyboard Al C7 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen m The bass split point is included in the left hand area of the TEMP keyboard 4 Touch lt Exit gt CA Registratio
7. Use the following measures to suppress such resonance e Place speakers so they are 10 15 cm from walls and other surfaces e Reduce the volume e Move the speakers away from any resonating objects Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center Could you be using a connection cable Use a connection cable that does not 228 that contains a resistor contain a resistor P Set the expression pedal function to p 200 PEDAL during playback Set the timing at which the arranger settings are called up Registration Arranger Update to INSTANT Troubleshooting Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment does not Sound Right n O O o Set Chord Hold to ON The Automatic Accompaniment will play while you press a chord If Chord Hold is Chord Hold is set to OFF turned ON the Automatic p 202 Accompaniment will continue playing with the Rhythm even when you take your hand off of the Lower keyboard When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard while Automatic Accompaniment and Rhythm are playing the Rhythm performance only remains playing When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment the Rhythm performance may not be sounded correctly This is not a malfunction Rhythm sounds odd When a voice is selected for the Pedal Bass part the bass of the Automatic This is not
8. J Sound KBD B e EB di To cancel operation touch lt Exit gt Touch lt gt lt gt to specify the For value the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly Touch lt Exit gt Touch lt Rec gt The Rec Play screen appears and the unit is placed in recording standby 10 Touch lt Play gt to begin recording When you touch lt Play gt the metronome will play two measures bars of count in before recording begins You can record repeatedly over the specified range of measures adding additional notes at each pass 1 1 Touch lt Stop gt to stop playback The indicator of the Rhythm track button which recorded the performance will light 175 Keig no 24M yorg Bulhe q Bulpiooey Recording Playing Back What You Play Starting Recording at the Right Moment Count In Recording This setting ON OFF determines whether or not a metronome count in 2 measures will be heard after pressing the Play Stop button on recording 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play NEW SONG Eee ___ _ _ opoopo ojia ooooon s ocra 6 J Sound KBD 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 47130 amp Rec Play Options Lyrics Playback Transpose Count in Rec Metronome 4 Touch lt 0 lt M to display the Count In Rec 176 9 Touch the Count In Rec settin
9. SLOW NORMAL FAST 6 Touch lt Exit gt Setting m These settings remain stored in memory even while the M EMO power is off 129 punos y 0 s4294 SNoUe A BulAjddy a u Applying Various Effects to the Sound 4 Touch the value setting buttons for Rota Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Color to adjust the ae r Effect Rotary Color Each time you touch the Rotary Color setting it will This setting allows you to choose the brightness of the Rotary switch between BRIGHT and MELLOW sound obtained when using the Rotary effect p 128 are etting 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen BRIGHT MELLOW Transpose 5 Touch lt Exit gt el z Biggest Band Regis These settings remain stored in memory even while the MEMO ee lmm power is off Solo Trumpet Org Lower rr Orch cree Bass D a Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint 4 2 Touch lt Effect gt The Effect screen appears Effect Rotary Speed Rotary Color Reverb Type Wall Type 3 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Rotary Color 130 ae ETE aana Adding Richness to the Sound Chorus Effect Chorus is an effect that adds expansiveness to a sound making one aa M EMO For some of the voices Chorus instrument sound like several You can apply a chorus effect for the Upper Orchestral and Lo
10. Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off Some music files have Lyrics included and these Lyrics can be displayed on the screen You can turn on or off the lyrics display of such music files ad i 2 L Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears Touch lt gt lt gt to display the Lyrics Rec Play Options Lyrics J Sound KBD Playback Transpose Count in Rec Metronome Touch the Lyrics setting to switch between ON and OFF Touch the setting to toggle the display of lyrics ON visible or OFF hidden Touch lt Exit gt If you press a voice select button while playing back music files that contains lyrics the display screen will switch and the lyrics will no longer be displayed To re display the lyrics touch lt Play gt on Rec Play screen once again This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs Playback Transpose SMF music files or a performance that you yourself recorded can be transposed for playback 2 6 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears Touch lt gt
11. noop ee Crows EES IF All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec Play screen In the same manner the vend Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm lamam i If you want to mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment open up the Track Mute screen and switch off the Track Mute buttons there p 159 9 Press a track button that is lit extinguishing the button When you play back the performance track buttons that are not lighted will be muted silenced Rec Play ATELIER O1 6 Press the track button once again button lights The part that had been muted will return to normal and will be heard 158 Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files Track button Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo 10 Channel 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 3 4 Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Performance Data Created with a Music ATELIER Track button Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Track Mute button 10 11 Drums SFX 13 Manual Percussion 5 6 7 89 t2 14 IS 2 Bass 3 Lower 4 Upper 1 Solo Se Recording Playing Back What You Play Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Data All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec Play screen In the same ma
12. now be played in the Upper keyboard M EMO You can adjust the Solo Split Point p 148 If the Solo To Lower is ON the Solo voice will not be heard from the upper keyboard MEMO You can change how the Solo voice will sound p 147 M EMO The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo voice range MEMO You can layer the Solo voice with the Lower voice so that they will sound together p 147 sua Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Changing How the Solo Voice Responds When the Solo voice is assigned to the Upper keyboard or the Lower keyboard you can specify how the Solo voice will respond when more than one key is pressed 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Upper gt The Upper Keyboard screen appears 3 Touch lt 2 gt lt J gt to display the Solo Mode Upper Keyboard ors Theater Ens Orch BrassSect 1 ED SESS Qo 4 Touch the Solo Mode setting the TOP NOTE LAST NOTE or POLYPHONIC indication Upper Keyboard 5mp 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description The Solo voice will sound the highest AEI note that is played for the Solo part The Solo voice will sound the note LAST NOTE that was most recently played for the Solo part POLYPHONIC The Solo voice will sound all notes that are played for the Solo part
13. 1 To open the lid hold it with both hands and slide it to the rear 2 To close the lid slowly pull it forward until it stops Be careful not to get your fingers caught when opening or NOTE closing the lid Adult supervision is recommended when small children are going to be using the instrument To prevent accidents be sure to close the lid before moving SOT ifie organ Make sure you don t have anything such as sheet music on NOES ihe keyboard when you close the lid Before You Start Playing Connecting the Power Cord l First make sure that the Power On switch at the panel s left side is OFF not pushed in l Power On OFF Upper position 2 Connect the supplied power cord to the AC Inlet connector then plug the other end into an AC outlet AC Outlet t Power Cord Only use the power cord supplied with this instrument Whenever you do not intend to use the instrument for NOTE extended periods of time pull out the power cord from the AC outlet 21 NuiAejd H8S NO 310439 aa Before You Start Playing Turning the Power On and Off Once the connections have been completed turn on or off power to your various devices in the order specified By NOTE turning on or off devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Turning On the Power 1 Make sure of the following before the power is turned on e s the power
14. 213 Type of Slide Show cccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeenaees 224 U WSR VOCE aeaeo nnen etn ceadee al eeec A8 Upper LOWER soctcietuiveienaedleenenconsiianeeamnncaeee 47 Allema ainena eaae N 47 USB audiri e eai 227 229 USB MIDI connector soccsccseesesesssesserreresssn 229 USB DENGE errre E E 230 User MEMON areren nsn aS 72 218 Index User Memory Reset ai4 pAcartcche ent Renata uaisoicuee dent 218 User Riv tin cean cea dedecbeauleateactauiaatadaresdts 187 Se OREA IOE AEE AEA E E TATAE 197 V VARIATION saneerata a einstein eaes 121 NV CI ICHION aerae e aes oaune EEO ae 79 MORENO erectus celebs de teen pases EEA AAT 251 VIMA TUNES scare een rete Santas eacticechtonsae 234 252 VOKO eR eae eee Cen Ee ere Te rN 46 251 Volume Part BGIGNESs aizina e a Sore 62 X KOE settee e E EAA 252 263 gt Oo 5 Q O D 0 xX pu 264 MEMO MEMO 265 Information EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 022 418 5531 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA T O MLS Sound amp Music Pty Ltd 2 ASTRON ROAD DENVER JOHANNESBURG ZA 2195 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 417 3400 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd Royal Cape Park Unit 24 Londonderry Road Ottery 7800 Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 799 4900 CHINA
15. 3 Regi JLE You can touch lt gt to open the Utility screen and MEMO then touch lt Note Edit gt in the Utility screen to open the Note Edit screen Erasing Sounds 3 Touch lt gt lt E gt io select the point where you want to erase the sound Std Close HH 47 229 StdCiose HH 47 SN 94 Zj Note Edit Std BD 1 Std Close HH Short Guiro fc necpiay Std Close HH 1 2 92 Short Guiro a Regisration A 4 When you touch lt Erase gt the selected sound is erased Adding Sounds 9 Touch lt gt lt E gt to select the point where you want to add the sound ZJ Note Edit 6 When you touch lt Create gt the new sound is added after the selected sound 193 swy yy puowuedwoovoy jeuibuo Bulyeai5 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Altering Voices 7 Touch lt gt lt M gt to select the sound whose voice you want to change 8 Touch the Instrument name Note Edit Short Guiro O eo fe O neo sta ose nH 27 as E 9 Touch lt 8 gt lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 8 gt to switch the voice Changing the Velocity 10 Touch lt gt lt E gt to select the sound whose velocity you want to change 1 1 Touch the Velocity setting Note Edit 4 4 Std Close HH Short Guiro Std Close HH a 12 Touch lt 10 gt lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 10 gt to change the velocity 194 Movi
16. 6 Touch lt Exit gt Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice When the Solo voice is being played by the Lower keyboard i e when the Solo To Lower button is ON you can specify whether the Lower voice and the Solo voice will sound together layered or will sound separately split 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Upper gt The Upper Keyboard screen appears 3 Touch lt K gt lt gt to display the Solo To Lower Mode Upper Keyboard ors Theater Ens Orch BrassSect 1 Cr SSCS 4 Touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting to switch between SPLIT and LAYER Each time you touch the Solo To Lower Mode setting i will alternate between SPLIT and LAYER Setting Description SPLIT The parts will sound separately The Lower voice and Solo voice will sound LAYER together 5 Touch lt Exit gt 147 Ajana pueoghey 1 m07 y BuIsN Jana od Eest E Changing the Solo Split Point 3 Touch lt E gt lt gt to change the Solo Split Point This setting is used to determine the Solo Split Point lower limit of the playable range of the Solo voice on the Lower Setting keyboard to any desired position A1 C7 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen m The key used for the solo split point is included in the Solo ME lanl voice range Transpose 4 Touch lt Exit gt ME
17. An Ending is played then the Rhythm stops While the Ending is playing the Intro Ending button indicator will light until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off Stopping the Rhythm with a short ending 1 Press the To Variation or To Original button and then press the Start Stop button A short Ending is played then the Rhythm stops Stopping without an Ending 1 Press the Start Stop button The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played urna Various Oher Stings Registration Settings Changing the Timing at Which l Transposition Settings are Recalled Changing the Timing at Which You can specify how the transpose setting will be recalled Arranger Settings are Recalled when you press a Registration button You can specify how the settings related to Rhythm 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen performances and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled D The Registration Load screen appears when you press a Registration button g pp 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Registration Load screen appears The Utility screen appears 2 Touch lt gt Utility 3 Touch lt Options gt The Utility screen appears The Registration Options screen appears th 3 Touch lt Options gt MA Registration Options The Registration Options screen appears HO LALA LMR Arranger Update INSTANT M Reit Ugie Trans
18. Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt The VIMA TUNES screen appears VIMA TUNES In the Mood kae 210 Playback Transpose Melody o Li te J cuas Recommended In SMF l Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax Tenor Sax2 J J jai The three recommended tones are shown in the lower part of the screen Touch one of the recommended tones in the screen to select a tone Touch lt gt 8 gt to start playing back the song Play along with the song The tones you play will be suitable for the character of the song Touch lt gt gt to stop playing back the song 9 CEG ome eT MMIII AAACN TALULA AAT ALLL Listening to Songs from Music CD Cou A Q You can connect a CD drive to the ATELIER and use it to play music CDs This lets you perform or sing along with the backing of a music CD Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the music CD into the CD drive Press the Song button The Song Select screen appears W Song Select 02 Track 2 D 03 Track 3 O4 Track 4 IQA Registration A ar E _ 2 eos a a Eee ea Sa eee SSS Touch lt gt lt gt to select the CD Touch lt 0 lt to select the song you want to play Touch lt gt gt to start playing back the song Touch lt 9 gt H to stop playing back the song Enjoying Music and Vid
19. When you press the Others button the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen but the basic screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen If you want to change the voice for the Others button press the Others button once more then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display M EMO A voice indicated by EX is called an EX voice These voices are especially recommended M EMO Sounds marked by AGT il support the Active Expression function p 59 51 spunos ul ejq pue Hunoajas Selecting and Playing Sounds 52 A sub window appears allowing you to select a sound group In the sub window touch a sound group name to select the desired sound group The indicator of the selected Others button will blink The Others Voice screen appears showing the sounds of the specified sound group Upper Organ Touch lt j lt J to switch screens and touch a voice name to select a voice Once again press the blinking Others button to confirm the voice The indicator of the Others button will change from blinking to lit ETNON MEMO You can touch lt AEx Voice gt in the Voice Select screen to have only the Active Expression voices be displayed Active Expression voices can be assigned to the Others buttons of the Upper Or
20. and OFF Each time you touch the Sustain setting it will alternate ON OFF Upper Keyboard Org Theater Ens Eam l OFF LONG T 4J Rec Play Orch BrassSect 1 Solo Trumpet Ct ECS Touch lt Exit gt ect Applying Various Effects to the Sound Changing the Sustain Length The sustain length can be set independently SHORT MIDDLE Medium or LONG for the Upper and Lower keyboards and Pedalboard 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Transpose Orch Oech Bass Exit Controller Effect Solidong Lower i Lower organo D 2 Touch either lt Upper gt lt Lower gt or lt Pedal gt Menu Part whose sustain length you wish to change Upper Upper part Lower Lower part Pedal Pedal part 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to display the Sustain Length Upper Keyboard Irs Theater Ens Orch BrassSect 1 Solo Trumpet cea 2 G You can open the Pedalboard screen Lower Keyboard MEMO screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching lt Pedal gt lt Lower gt and lt Upper gt 4 For the part whose sustain length you wish to adjust touch the Sustain SHORT MIDDLE LONG display Upper Keyboard 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the value Setting SHORT MIDDLE LONG 6 Touch lt Exit gt 135 punos y 0 s1294 snoneg BulAiddy ig or et pe Adding Reverberation to the
21. stun ecordng eying Back What You Play Erasing a Performance Song Song Clear m You can also use the following method to open the M EMO g P Song Clear screen Touch lt Quick Guide gt on the Main screen to If you wish to discard your recording and re record from the display the Quick Guide screen beginning or if you wish to record a new performance you must erase the previously recorded data Press the Song button The Song Clear screen appears 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Changing the Name of a Performance Song Rename J J 130 Rec Play ATELIER 01 eli el Track ee J Sound KBD TUNES Solo A name is automatically assigned to a performance song that C o go gt ages pretest you record However at some point you may wish to change the name to something more meaningful Bcra EERE 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt oO gt Utility The Utility screen appears Rec Play ATELIER O1 et aye ee Solo UNES 2 Sowane Sound KBD oo0og00ooea ocz B 2 Touch lt o gt Utility 3 Touch lt Song Clear gt The Utility screen appears The following message asking you to confirm your choice will be displayed A Clear Song 0K Cancel If you touch lt Cancel gt the performance data will not be erased and
22. 171 Recording Playing Back What You Play 6 Touch lt Delete gt a The confirmation message appears Layering q New Recording onto SMF Music Files You can load commercially available SMF music files into the A ES eee ene Ke ATELIER and record your own performance on top of it During recording the data you ve loaded will be played back while you record your performance Cancel 1 Prepare the SMF music files If you touch lt Cancel gt the performance data will not be If you re using SMF music files from USB memory deleted and you will return to the Rec Play screen connect it to the external memory connector If you re using SMF music files from a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector 7 When you touch lt OK gt the performance data will be deleted and insert the floppy disk 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 3 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 4 Touch lt Song Select gt The Song Select screen appears Song Select 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 O4 ATELIER 04 O5 ATELIER 05 at DETE 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to play SMF music files from User Memory choose Favorites If you want to play SMF music files from USB memory choose Ext Memory If you want to play SMF music files fro
23. 2 2 3 button are valid only for vintage organ voices of the upper part Using the Harmonic Bar Settings of the Panel If you ve edited the harmonic bar settings in the screen or if you ve switched Registrations so that the Vintage Organ settings have changed you can switch the Vintage Organ settings to the positions settings of the harmonic bars on the panel p 53 Press the H Bar Manual button When you press the Vintage Organ button a vintage organ screen like the following will appear Vintage Organ Screen Upper Vintage Organ NURO NOO The screen will show the harmonic bars By touching the harmonic bars and sliding them you can adjust the volume of each footage The volume can be adjusted over nine steps 0 8 When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way 8 the volume is loudest When it is pushed in all the way 0 there will be no sound Icon Description Vib Vibrato Adds a vibrato effect to the sound Cho Chorus Adds a chorus effect to the sound U L P Touching lt gt cycles you through the available choices which are Upper Vintage screen Lower Vintage screen and Pedal Vintage screen The Vintage Organ screen will automatically close after it has Hold been displayed for several seconds If you touch lt Hold gt the screen will remain displayed until you touch lt Hold gt once again Selecting and Playing Sounds MEMO When you touch the Vintage
24. Based on the idea that you should be able to sit down and begin playing immediately the operation buttons of the panel are arranged by function as dictated by classic organ traditions ensuring easy and intuitive operation All models of the ATELIER series feature the same operability allowing you to start playing immediately even if you switch models High quality sounds that you can use without editing In addition to a full range of organ sounds high quality sounds such as strings and brass are also included onboard You can simply select sounds and enjoy playing the organ no need to perform complicated editing operations Expansive lower keyboard with damper pedal for piano like expressiveness The piano is indispensable to contemporary music performance All models of the ATELIER series contain high quality grand piano sounds that you will enjoy performing In addition the range of the lower keyboard has been expanded giving you greater expressive capabilities on the piano A damper pedal and initial touch sensitivity are also provided both necessities for piano performance Design utilizes your existing music data The ATELIER series is designed so that even on new models you will feel right at home and can begin playing immediately Consideration has been given to data compatibility and existing song data or Registration data can be moved to USB memory or used by connecting a floppy disk drive Music styles from around the world Many
25. Mic Volume knob to adjust the volume level for the microphone MEMO You can adjust the depth of the echo applied to sound from lmam the microphone p 211 The microphone must be purchased separately When MEMO purchasing a microphone please consult the vender where you bought the ATELIER Some Notes on Using a Microphone CAUTION e To avoid disturbing others be careful of the volume level when playing late at night or very early in the morning e When connecting a microphone to the ATELIER be sure to lower the volume If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in noise may be produced by the speakers e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by e Changing the orientation of the microphone e Relocating the microphone so it is farther from the speakers e Lowering volume levels 23 Buikejq H8S no 310499 Before You Start Playing Using the Cord Hook If you re using headphones or a microphone you can use the cord hook to neatly bundle the cables near your feet Attaching the Cord Hook 1 Screw the cord hook with wing nut about 80 of the way into the screw hole located at the bottom left of the organ 2 After you ve oriented the hook as desired use the wing nut to fasten it Screw Hole Wing Nut Cord Hook a 24 u Restoring All the Factory Default Settin
26. O O mone snamem x o o o o O ERZA EA E MEE AEA BAEP AREE SJ T11363 2006 HAEE R RERA F X RAR A EE EMAED EAEE AEE A EEH SJ T11363 2006 PREBLE NEER KARRA RRE BRAA DRE EE For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of EMCD 2004 108 EC and LVD 2006 95 EC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technic
27. Organ screen and then change the settings the screen is held in that condition MEMO By touching the screen and sliding your fingertip to the left or right horizontally you can adjust the volume of all harmonic bars lt is not possible to apply both vibrato and chorus simultaneously 57 spunos ul ejq pue Hunoajas Selecting and Playing Sounds EA Adjusting the Volume of the Vintage Organ You can adjust the overall volume of the sound to regulate the volume balance relative to the other sounds 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Transpose C Registration Sound Keyboard Org r Theater Ens g Orch Wan svelte BrassSect 1 p Trumpet L Org g MD L ower Organ2 BS Orch Pedal Organ Bass 2 Touch lt Effect gt The Effect screen appears l J 130 Effect m Rotary Speed a 4 Sound KBD Rotary Color Reverb Type Wall Type 58 3 Touch lt M gt lt i gt to display the VintageOrganVolume E J 130 amp Effect T J Sound KBD Rev Depth A Bass Rev Depth Vintage VintageOrganVolume 4 Touch the value setting buttons for VintageOrganVolume to adjust the setting Effect ee Rev Depth A Rass Ao gt J Sound KBD WW cactory I ke Rec Pla CA Regisraion E Main f 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to edit the value Setting 1 12 6 Touch lt Exit gt
28. Touch lt gt lt B gt to switch the screen then touch a Rhythm name to select the Rhythm Rhythm Load 7 ee z J Sound KBD y 4 Latin Fusion a ral 2 Slow Rumba an z 3 Trad Tango C necpiay man You can touch lt Preview gt to hear how the Rhythm sounds 6 Touch Division lt gt lt gt to select the Division you want to call up Selecting ALL calls up all of the Divisions 7 Use the Variation buttons of the panel to change the arrangement of the accompaniment 8 Touch lt Load gt The Rhythm is called up and the Rhythm Customize screen returns to the display Se Creating Original Accompaniment Rhyhns ae z Changing the Drum Set Making the Division Settings SP Pe eer ery ST TTS TTT ee TTT ee a A ak 4 Touch the value set for Drum Set Independent Drum Set Beat and Volume settings can be made for each Division B Division Options 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 Std BD 1 Short Guiro E a 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 6 Touch lt Exit gt The Division Options screen reappears 2 Touch lt S gt Utility Changing the Beat The Utility screen appears 7 Touch the Beat setting huthm Ciotamiza Mamha a 5 DON Options EE eT 8 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 3 Touch lt Div Options gt Division Options g
29. Update INSTANT Arranger Update INSTANT Trans Update INSTANT 4 Touch the Trans Update Transpose Update setting to switch between DELAYED and INSTANT between DELAYED and INSTANT alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting it will Setting Description alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT DELAYED Transpose settings will be recalled when you Setting Description hold a Registration button for several seconds Settings related to Rhythm performances and Transpose setting will be recalled the instant Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled INSTANT you press a button along with all other panel when you hold a Registration button for several settings DELAYED seconds If you quickly press the Registration button only the panel settings voice etc that 5 Touch lt Exit gt are not related to Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be updated m This setting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMO lamaml turned off Settings related to Rhythm performances and INSTANT Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled the lt instant you press a button along with all other panel settings 5 Q 5 Touch lt Exit gt D This setting remains stored in memory even while power is Q Nem Ts sting i P lmm turned off 205 Various Other Settings iran Composer Settings
30. automatically be called up for Registration 1 4 buttons Press the Registration 1 4 button to select panel settings On the Lower keyboard play a chord At the moment you play the lower keyboard the Intro will begin and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play Press the Intro Ending or Start Stop button to stop the Rhythm Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment stops Press the One Touch Program button extinguishing its indicator You will return to the panel settings that were in effect prior to pressing the One Touch Program button Using Rhythm Performance MEMO When you press the One Touch Program button the Arranger Update setting will automatically change to INSTANT p 99 MEMO To redisplay the One Touch Program Group screen while holding down the Registration Write button press the One Touch Program button Touch the One Touch Program Group screen to reselect the group MEMO The One Touch Program function will be turned off if you re using the Quick Registration function p 35 or if you ve loaded a Registration p 106 85 SOUBWOLedg Uyyy Buisn Using Rhythm Performance Using a Rhythm from a USB Memory The ATELIER contains a variety of Rhythms but you can also use Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk to perform Rhythms in an even wider range of styles Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory 86 Press t
31. in or out you can adjust the volume of the various footages The volume can be adjusted over nine steps 0 8 When a harmonic bar is pulled out all the way 8 the volume is loudest When it is pushed in all the way 0 there will be no sound 8 is the footage that forms the basic pitch of the sound this is the center around which you create the tone Each harmonic bar is assigned a sine wave a pure pitch without overtones of a different pitch and by combining these pitches you can create a wide range of sounds 8 volume 8 Time BAP 4 volume 53 spunos 6bulAe g pue Burjo9ajes a Selecting and Playing Sounds 54 What s the feet Feet is a term that began as a measurement of the length of the pipes in a pipe organ The pipes that produce the basic pitch fundamental for each note are considered to be 8 feet in length Therefore a pipe producing a pitch one octave below that of the reference of 8 eight feet would be 16 for one octave above the reference the pipe would be 4 and to take the pitch up yet another octave it would be shortened to 2 The pitches of the harmonic bars are related as follows When the middle C C4 note is pressed each harmonic bar will sound the following notes P O10 Ko o P B amp B O10 Koo NMNoBOODN OO P BO1O Ko o P BROOD NO MmN oBROON OO PM or Ko o P BOO N 16 53 8 4
32. lt B gt to display the Playback X 4 Transpose Rec Play Options Lyrics Playback Transpose Count in Rec Metronome Rec Play Options Lyrics Playbac Count i Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting The key is transposed by one semitone each time lt gt or lt gt key is touched Setting 6 0 5 semitone steps 7 Touch lt Exit gt 3 UMUC NUTT LIMA Various Other Settings Changing the Metronome Setting You can change the way in which the metronome will sound 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears 4 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the Metronome Rec Play Options males Playback Transpose Count in Rec Metronome Rec Play Options Lyrics 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description OFF Not heard at all REC Heard only while recording ON Heard constantly 7 Touch lt Exit gt Adjusting the Metronome Volume You can adjust the volume of the metronome 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears 4 Touch lt Q gt lt B gt to display the Metronome Vol Met
33. lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rhythm Options screen appears 4 Touch lt Q gt lt B gt to display the Count Down Sound Rhythm Options Se Chord Intelligence J Sound KB Chord Hold Leading Bass 9 Touch the Count Down Sound setting to switch between VOICE and STICK Each time you touch the Count Down Sound setting it will alternate between VOICE and STICK Setting Description VOICE Human voice count One two three STICK Stick sound count 6 Touch lt Exit gt Se Various Oher Stings Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Changing the Operation of the Fill In Switching Automatically Buttons You can prevent Rhythm tempos from switching automatically You can change the operation of the Fill In Auto button and when you switch Rhythms Fill In Break button so that they work in the same way as on the S series 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen ihe Riyhiisereorappears 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rhythm Options screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rhythm Options screen appears 4 Touch lt gt lt B gt to display the Aut
34. on the Main screen Transpose a i 4 C Biggest Band S Rhythm S ower Organ2 Orch KESh Bass a 2 Touch lt Effect gt The Effect screen appears Effect Rotary Speed Rotary Color Reverb Type Wall Type 3 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Wall Type 138 4 Touch the value setting buttons for Wall Type to adjust the setting The following screen appears Effect Rotary Sneed 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Display DRAPERY CARPET ACOUSTIC TILE WOOD BRICK PLASTER CONCRETE BLOCK MARBLE Description Pleated curtain Carpet Acoustical tile sound absorptive tile Wood Brick Plaster Concrete block Marble 6 Touch lt Exit gt ect Applying Various Effects to the Sound Changing the Depth of the Reverb You can specify the reverb depth for each part To adjust the reverb depth for Upper Lower Pedal Solo 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Transpose Lower Ji Lower organo D Crea Bass 1 p n Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint F L 2 Touch lt Upper gt lt Lower gt or lt Pedal gt Menu Part whose reverb length you wish to change Upper Upper part Solo part Lower Lower part Pedal Pedal part 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to display the Reverb Depth Upper Keyboard ors Theater Ens o 8 Orch EC SM BrassSect
35. 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up N where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 GS Format G The GS Format is Roland s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds provides for the editing of sounds and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features including effects such as reverb and chorus Designed with the future in mind the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI Roland s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it per
36. 223 2 13 5 11 3 one octave 5th root 8th 12th 15th 17th 19th 22nd below e K e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e A e e e P zZ e lt O n ee C 7 A aga SY re cs es Z Ge Je fF O On tonewheel organs the high pitched footage for a portion of the high range and the low pitched footage for a portion of the low range are folded back in units of one octave Folding back the high frequency portion prevents the high frequency sounds from being unpleasantly shrill and folding back the low frequency portion prevents the sound from becoming muddy On the ATELIER faithfully simulates this characteristic Selecting and Playing Sounds Playing a Vintage Organ Voice Turning on Vintage Organ 1 Press the Vintage Organ On Off button so its indicator is lit Each time you press the button the indicator will alternate between ON lit and OFF Vintage Organ On Off J The Vintage organ screen appears The glide pitch bend and Upper Vintage Organ ee l sustain effects cannot be applied to vintage organ voices spunos ul ejq pue Huoejas pe S Ee 8 S 6 5 4 3 2 1 Rec Play eee SSS pece E cA Registration ae n ie a Tm ee oo Modifying the Sound 2 Slide the harmonic bars that you want to hear Slide the harmonic bars to adjust the volume of each footage over a range of nine
37. Accompaniment part Volume of the Rhythm drum part Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part Volume of the Rhythm bass part Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part 253 gt Oo 5 Q O D o HO POUN S JeMod 24 Jey Pe0 S ay yeu SBuINES Roland Organ Date Sep 1 2008 Model AT 500 MIDI implementation Chart Version 1 00 Basic Default 1 Solo 1 Solo Channel 2 Pedal 2 Pedal 3 Lower 3 Lower 4 Upper 4 Upper 11 Drums SFX 11 Drums SFX 13 Manual Percussion 13 Manual Percussion 16 Expression PC V LINK 16 Expression 1 16 GM2 GS X Changed Default Mode 3 Messages Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered KKK KKKKKKK KEK Note 24 110 0 127 Number True Voice KKKKKKKKKKKKKE 0 127 Note ON O Velocity Note OFF 8n v 64 After Key s D 3 Touch Ch s 9 2o am 7 oo Pitch Bend ere oe O o 7 9 x OO Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression General purpose controller 1 Glide Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Resonance Release Time Attack Time Cut off Decay Time Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Portamento control Effect depth Effect3 depth NRPN LSB MSB 2 7 8 9 RPN LSB MSB Prog 0 127 s MOOR Change True E E EE E N number 1 128 wS O System Exclusive wS O Song Pos x Song Sel x x Tune x x System Clock x Real Time Commands x All sound off O 120 126 127 7 8 A Reset all controllers O 7 8 UX Local C
38. Bulke q H8S no 310499 Before You Start Playing Using a CD You can play back audio CDs and CD ROMs containing saved SMF music files seas You can also play songs on VIMA CD ROMs VIMA TUNES lmam sold by Roland Precautions Concerning Use of the CD e The ATELIER is capable of playing back only commercial CDs that conform the official standards those that carry the COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO logo e The usability and sound quality of audio discs that incorporate copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs cannot be guaranteed e For more detailed information on audio discs featuring copyright protection technology and other non standard CDs please consult the disc vendor e You cannot save songs to CDs and you cannot delete songs recorded to CDs Furthermore you cannot format CDs 28 Connecting a CD Drive CD drives that draw their power from the USB connector cannot be used Ext Drive Connector USB Cable 1 Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the CD drive to be connected 2 Connect the USB cable included with the CD drive to the Ext Drive connector on the ATELIER 3 Turn on the power to the ATELIER e Turn on the power to the connected CD drive For information on how to perform the following CD drive operations refer to the owner s manual for the drive NOTE e Switching the power on and off e Inserting and ejecting a CD A list of the CD drives th
39. Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 1 2 Touch lt OK gt to delete the measures When deletion has been completed you are returned to the Delete Measure screen 180 Delete the Recording from a Track Delete Track The ATELIER has seven tracks This function lets you delete the recording from a track that you specify For more on the content stored on each track refer to p sh 154 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears j J 130 Rec Play ATELIER 01 M PU e n Sound KBD ye tet le eye s co Solo ooggoc EE ree a 2 Inthe Rec Play screen touch lt gt Utility to open the Utility screen 3 In the Utility screen touch lt Edit gt The Edit Menu screen appears E Edit Menu Buon Delete Measure Delete Track Es E Quantize Rename CA Registration uci Editing Your Musical Performance Data J 130 Meal J Sound KBD 4 Rec Play QA Registration man The Delete Track delete the performance data of a track screen appears Delete Track fe 2 RHYTHM ee 5 Touch the Track value the track whose performance data you wish to delete 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the Track the track whose performance data you wish to delete Delete Track ie J Sound KBD Setting RHYTHM ACCOMP BASS LOWER UPPER
40. Del Deletes a character Inserts a space blank Space Move the cursor the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input to left or right To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt Se Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory You can take User Rhythms created with the Rhythm Customize function and save them in the ATELIER s User memory and USB memory To call up Rhythms saved in User memory press the User button 2 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 Touch lt E gt Utility The Utility screen appears Ham Touch lt Save gt The Rhythm Save screen appears Rhythm Save Acari Ow Touch lt gt lt gt to determine the save destination Select Ext Memory to save the data in USB memory or Favorites to save it in user memory Select Disk to save the data in floppy disk Touch lt H lt J to select the number of the save destination 6 MEMO Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed as Rhythm Save Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms To cancel the save touch lt Exit gt to close the Rhythm Save screen You can change the name of a Rhythm by touching lt Rename gt Touch lt Save gt The User Rhyt
41. Lower voice the Pedal Bass voice will also be heard and will play the root note If the Leading Bass function is on p 82 the lowest note played in the lower keyboard will sound the pedal bass voice Press the Pedal To Lower bution indicator turns off The Pedal Bass voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard MEN dha m AE ALAA bcc If no portion of the Lower keyboard is sounding the Lower voice the Drums SFX button is ON the Pedal Bass voice will not sound It is not possible to select and play both Bass Split and Pedal To Lower buttons simultaneously If the Pedal To Lower is ON the Pedal Bass voice will not be heard from the Pedalboard MEMO If no voice is selected for the lower keyboard you can use the lower keyboard to play the pedal voice Recording Playing Back What You Play The internal composer can record performances and play back commercial SMF music files The composer can be used in the following two ways Using the Panel Composer Buttons Composer Song Registration S5 5 S Reset Play Stop Rec J gl i EI I lt Button Reset Play Stop Rec Song Registration Demo gt i Description Returns you to the beginning of the song Starts and stops playback of the song After the Rec button has been pressed putting the composer in record standby mode recording then starts when the Play Stop butto
42. Main screen Recording expression pedal operations Transpose This will depend on the function of the expression pedal Recording of expression operations will differ depending on the setting for Exp Src Rec For details refer to Changing the Function of the Expression Pedal p 199 If you wish to erase all the recorded data and record new MEMO performance data use the editing function Erase erase performance data to erase the data p 167 The Rec Play screen appears The following buttons are referred to as the track buttons Rec Play NEW SONG ore Solo All accompaniment data is grouped to the Accomp track button in the Rec Play screen In the same manner the ms Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm MEMO lmam f you want fo mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment open up the Track Mute screen and switch off the Track Mute buttons there p 159 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike 4 6ulpsooey 155 aU 2 Press the Song button Recording Playing Back What You Play Playing Back Performance Composer Songs Stored on USB Memory Nes eee and SMF Music Files FV G In addition to playing back the music you recorded on the Reset Play Stop Rec enjoy a wide variety of commercially available song files C a _ such as defined below ma gt a instrument and saved to a USB memory ATELIER
43. Percussion 144 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Part by Hand Set Bass Split to ON to play the Pedal Bass voice from the Lower keyboard p 149 By changing the combination of voices that are played on the Lower keyboard and by changing the Solo Split Point p 148 and Bass Split Point p 151 you can create the following types of setup 145 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard Solo To Lower Button 146 Normally the solo voice will sound on the upper keyboard By using the Solo To Lower button you can play the solo voice in the right hand side of the lower keyboard that includes the B4 key The state in which the keyboard is divided in this way is called split and the location at which the keyboard is divided to play the solo voice in the lower keyboard is called the Solo Split Point Level roa 3 A os L Alternate To Lower FINALE Solo Select a Solo voice p 50 Press the Solo To Lower button indicator lights When you play the Lower keyboard the Solo voice will sound in the range to the right of the Solo Split Point Lower keyboard Solo voice WLLL EHAE Solo Split Point To turn off the Solo split press the Solo To Lower button indicator turns off The Solo voice will no longer sound in the Lower keyboard the Solo voice will
44. Quick Guide gt on the Main screen MEMO The following Quick Guide screen appears If another screen is open touch lt Main gt to access the main screen While the Quick Guide screen is displayed press a button MEMO A For more on keys buttons and keyboard pedal or foot switch controllers that can be used You will be taken to the screen that contains settings related to the button with the Quick Guide function keyboard pedal or foot switch that you pressed ie e ip Make settings in the screen to which you jumped When you are finished making settings touch lt Exit gt to close the screen 41 suonouny JUBIUBAUOD Convenient Functions About the Index Menu 42 In the Quick Guide screen you can touch lt Index gt to access the Index Menu In the Index Menu screen you can touch a keyword to jump to the setting screen for that keyword Touch lt Quick Guide gt on the Main screen The following Quick Guide screen appears J Sound KBD O Rec Play N Touch lt Index gt The following screen appears Touch a letter of the alphabet to select the first letter of the desired keyword Transpose sJ 130 amp 7 eM 1 TE lt NTNU TTT TTT AAPA GHG TTT AAA Save Song Send PC Switch 4 Touch the desired keyword Quick Guide Index _ Save Registration Solo Mode Save Song Solo Split P
45. Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND ROLAND POLSKA SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03 664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 4419 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia S L Portugal Office Cais das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 Porto PORTUGAL TEL 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek Dorozhnaya ul 3 korp 6 117 545 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 981 4967 SLOVAKIA DAN Acoustic s r o Povazska 18 SK 940 01 Nov Zamky TEL 035 6424 330 SPAIN Roland Iberia S L Paseo Garcia Faria 33 35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE EURHYTHMICS Ltd P O Box 37 a Nedecey Str 30 UA 89600 Mukachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 1231 amp 1249 Rumaytha Building Road 3931 Manama 339 BAH
46. Roland Service Center The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location e In order to provide the highest possible image quality the ATELIER uses a TFT liquid crystal display Due to the nature of a TFT liquid crystal display the screen may contain pixels that fail to light or that remain constantly lit but please be aware that this is not a malfunction or defect Floppy Disk Handling Using Optional Floppy Disk Drive e Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the oe when handling floppy disks Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas e Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temperature range 10 50 degrees C 50 122 degrees F e Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers e Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when y
47. SOLO CONTROL 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 8 Touch lt Execute gt The following display appears A Delete Track 0K Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 9 Touch lt OK gt to delete the performance data When the recording has been deleted the Delete Track screen will reappear 181 eyeq SsoURWOLe seoisnyy ino Bunipy a n x 2 Inthe Rec Play screen touch lt fE gt Utility to Erase Recording Erase Event open the Utility screen Editing Your Musical Performance Data You can erase a specified portion of the performance in a specitied area without making the song shorter This is called the Erase function As an alternative to the method of erasing all performance data in a specified area you can erase the following contents of the performance Setting Description ALL All recording NOTE Notes played on the keyboard 3 In the Utility screen touch lt Edit gt Panel operations The Edit Menu screen appears Content Saved to the Control Track PANEL Information Other than Expression Voice and Tempo Data Edit Menu gt Refer to p 154 Delete Measure Delete Track EXPRESSION Expression pedal recording VOICE Voice settings TEMPO Tempo setting Example Erasing measures bars 5 8 ESEJESES 7 EGE ee Delete Measure blank measures 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the
48. SONGS erea E T ee grimace E ances 234 Listening to VIMA TUNES SONG cosca noia e E E dateleniatavien 234 Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays cccccccssseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeees 236 Performing with Sounds that Match the Song Recommended TOMES secsene cease eet esta taka eds Senile acta oen ks ere Gait Aleksei sdeecaas 238 Listening to Songs from Music CDs sedcscncawnssetacunaeaadaenauaeeanalin Seaoht OEE NER 239 Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD Center Cancel ccccccceceessseeeeeeeeeeaseeeseeeeees 240 Appendices TOUDE NOON Ree ene cee nee nee TR TE Ome ar mn ner EN mest TE eT RR ee eT 24 POr INC SSO Oe octet fae desea gene oa ge EAA A EE es oat tec EE AE team tenetntae ae 248 CNC D Ace mcrae PEE A AN ea tesa sacs sedate REAA TETE 249 ohio py eee eee oe eae Penne os To nee E Oo Noe eee wan et mee eee 251 Music Files That ihe ATELIER Cc Sis stat atari tare 08 ate teeta laevis E E EE E 252 The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 Abouttne ATELIER Sound GENSRGION vests tek trendsetters steed S 252 Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off cccccccccecsseeecccceeeseneeeeeeeeeaaene sees 253 Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off ccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 253 Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons cccccccsseeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeseeeeeeenans 253 Settings That Are St
49. Solo Trumpet You can open the Pedalboard screen Lower Keyboard MEMO screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching lt Pedal gt lt Lower gt and lt Upper gt 4 Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust The following screen appears Upper Keyboard 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to adjust the setting Setting 0 10 6 Touch lt Exit gt 139 punos y 0 s4294 SNoUe A BulAjddy a rs eon tha nh son so To Adjust the Reverb Depth for Something other Than Upper Lower Pedal Solo Rev Depth Accomp EE E EE EE EE EE EE EE EE E E E o E o o e o e e e e e a e E e E E E E E e Rev Depth Rhythm Effect l Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Rev Depth Drums Rev Depth M Perc EEIE Effect Rev Depth A Bass Rev Depth Vintage co VintageOrganVolume z H Sound Keyboard Tj p ave art Org va Theater Ens es 7 7 Orch g Z Sound KeD Accomp Automatic accompaniment other than the bass BrassSect amp Trumpet part ara E Lower Okzand M lt Rhythm Rhythm performance Drums Drums SFX Orch M Perc Manual Percussion A Bass Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment PEER pagal Le J Vintage Vintage Organ a d 4 Touch the part whose reverb depth you wish to adjust The following screen appears 2 Touch lt Effect gt The Effect screen appears Effect 1130 Rev Depth A
50. Sound Reverb Effect Reverb is an effect that adds a sense of spaciousness to the sound creating the illusion of playing in a large or small concert hall a large or small room a small club etc Accomp Reverb SMF Rhythm CJ WU O CJ LJ U Part Balance 1 Press the Reverb A or V buttons to adjust the overall Reverb amount When you press the up button A additional Reverb is applied Pressing the down button W decreases the Reverb level If none of the Reverb indicators are lit the Reverb effect will not be heard When you press the Reverb A V buttons the Part Balance Monitor screen MEMD lamam appears In the Part Balance Monitor screen you can check the reverb depth fhe Fort Balance Monifer screen is displayed for several seconds and then closes automatically If you touch lt Hold gt the screen continues to be displayed until you touch lt Exit gt again 136 MITTIN Applying Various Effects to the Sound EAHA MAMAN PP YNY ts to t 4 Touch the value setting buttons for Reverb Type to adjust the setting By changing the reverberations of the notes you can enjoy the The following screen appears Changing the Reverb Type atmosphere of performance in a wide variety of different locations Effect l e Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Rotary Sneed Quick Music Registration Assistant 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to c
51. System Tx MIDI Ch M Pere Tx MIDI Ch Ctrl Main Bouncing Ball Main Background 3 Touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting to switch between ON and OFF Each time you touch the Main Bouncing Ball setting it will alternate between ON and OFF Setting Description ON The bouncing ball appears in the main screen OFF The bouncing ball does not appear in the main screen 4 Touch lt Exit gt This setting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMO X j lmm turned off Switching the Background of the Main Screen You can change the color and pattern for the main screen s background 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Main Background X System Tx MIDI Ch M Perc Tx MIDI Ch Ctrl Main Bouncing Ball Main Background 3 Touch the Main Background setting 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting east TEA I J is A Registratio 214 5 Touch lt Exit gt The System screen appears 6 Touch lt Exit gt on the System Screen The main screen appears with the selected background r this setting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMO 9 Y p lmm turned off urna Various Oher Stings The V LINK function is turned on and the V LINK icon Using the V LINK Function appears in the main screen Connecting
52. The VIMA TUNES screen is displayed This button is shown only in the Rec Play record play screen 153 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Bulke q4 6ulpsooey Recording Playing Back What You Play u rar What is a Track Button The recorded performance will be automatically assigned to the seven Track buttons according to the recorded part You can record or play back independently by specifying the desired Track button for example when you wish to re record a track Rec Play NEW SONG d ound KB Vima TUNES cA Registration You can record different kinds of performance data into each track Track Recorded Performance Rhythm performance Control Rhythm Drums SFX Manual percussion Accomp Automatic Accompaniment except Bass Pedal Bass Voice Performance Data Note Bass Bender Modulation Bass part of the Automatic Accompaniment Pawar Lower Voice Performance Data Note Hold Bender Modulation Upper Voice Performance Data Note Hold Upper l Bender Modulation Solo Solo Voice Performance Data Note Hold Bender Modulation Glide Expression Reverb Type Reverb Depth Solo To Lower button ON OFF Pedal To Lower button ON OFF Control Transpose button setting MEMO Harmony Intelligence button ON OFF Harmony Intelligence Type Rotary Fast Slow button ON OFF Rotary On Off button ON OFF Pedal Bass Mode 154 Track Recorded Performance Solo Mode
53. The new name is now inserted PEE La uJ SSS J Sound KBD Song Save Song Delete 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 04 ATELIER 04 Ou You cannot directly change or edit the name of a performance song stored on a USB memory or floppy disk The song must first be loaded p 170 into the instrument edited and then saved to USB memory or floppy disk again Youcan also access the Rename screen as MEMO lm follows Touch lt p gt Utility on the Rec Play screen The Utility screen appears In the Utility screen touch lt Edit gt The Edit Menu screen appears Touch lt Rename gt on the Edit Menu screen The Rename screen appears ome al Recording Playing Back What You Play UMMA 4 Touch lt Save Delete gt The Song Save Song Delete screen appears The performance data that you recorded will disappear when Song Save Song Delete the power of the ATELIER is turned off If you wish to keep the Media Favorit performance data you can save it on a USB memory floppy P OEE disk or Favorites user memory 02 ATELIER 02 If the recorded performance data has not been saved the _O3 ATELIER 03 04 ATELIER 04 display will show the mm EDITED i symbol This symbol will o elete disappear when you save the performance data r g 1 Prepare to save the performance song If you want to save performance song to a USB memory connec
54. The selected performance data will be loaded into continue internal memory If you want to delete a song in floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert a floppy disk If the Following Screen Appears into the drive The message below is shown when the performance song in T Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen the unit has not been saved to USB memory or Favorites User The Rec Play screen appears Memory 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Save Delete gt A Clear Song OK The Song Save Song Delete screen appears Song Save Song Delete Cancel S d KBD J Soun ae If you wish to erase the performance TET song O3 ATELIER 03 1 Touch lt OK gt 04 ATELIER O4 If you wish to erase the performance song 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media l Touch lt Cancel gt If you want to delete a song from the user memory Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk p 169 choose Favorites If you want to delete a song from USB memory choose Ext Memory If you want to If loading is canceled because the memory limit has been delse asong hom tleppy disk choose Bide 9 Touch lt H lt J to select the performance data that you wish to delete reached the following message will be displayed Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike 4 6ulpsooey A Memory Full Close
55. a malfunction Accompaniment will not sound The bass note of the Automatic Accompaniment does not sound When you started a Rhythm with an Intro the Rhythm did not sound PRS Chora dnietigence Chord Intelligence is set to OFF Set Chord Intelligence to ON p 80 Auto Std Tempo Auto Standard Tempo is set to OFF When the Auto Std Tempo setting is set to ON and Rhythms are switched Tempo not changing even when while the Rhythm is stopped the tempo the source tempo is reselected is automatically set to the tempo for when arranging Rhythms using that Rhythm the Rhythm Customize function The tempo setting does not change automatically even if the Rhythms are switched with the Auto Std Tempo setting set to OFF and the Rhythm stopped The keys for a chord were not pressed Either turn on the Chord Intelligence 80 simultaneously function or play the chord correctly P When Chord Intelligence is OFF the chord is not being pressed correctly Some Rhythms do not have Rhythm This is not a malfunction sounds in the intro Set Auto Std Tempo to ON p 203 Either turn on the Chord Intelligence function or play the chord correctly p 80 Automatic Accompaniment sounds odd When performance data from a device other than the ATELIER is being played together with the Automatic Accompaniment the Automatic Accompaniment may not be s
56. a slide show suitable for the character of the song oa ere eng cP or play along using recommended tones eae Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears Touch lt Utility gt amg Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt ee You can also press the panel s The VIMA TUNES screen appears Song button and choose a _ E VIMA TUNES song from Song TEAS In the Mood J E Select screen Video i SlideShow IP Transpose Melody TH Sop ca It will take a certain amount of Recommended In SMF TEEN 2 rat es shee TUNES song Vibraphone Oboe Tenor Sax2 can be selected Touch lt ma gt lt gt to select the song you want to play n Enjoying Music ond Video S1 VIMA TUNES In the Mood Video SlideShow Playback Transpose Melody Mute Guide Recommended In SMF You can touch Playback Transpose lt gt lt gt to change the key of the song When you touch Melody lt Mute gt in the screen the melody will be muted You can mute the melody and play the melody yourself When you touch Melody lt Guide gt in the screen the volume of the melody will be lowered You can leave the melody playing at a lowered volume and play along until you ve learned the melody Since you will still be able to hear the melody you can use it as a guide during pra
57. again indicator lights MEMO t rl You can also confirm the ee Rhythm by touching lt Exit gt in The Rhythm button s indicator will change from blinking to light the Rhythm screen 71 Using Rhythm Performance Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory The ATELIER features a User memory What is the User Memory This is the internal memory area that lets you store User Rhythms you ve created You can also copy Rhythms saved on USB memory to the User memory p 87 The ATELIER is shipped from the factory with Rhythms already stored in User memory These Rhythms can be rewritten at will either by copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory or by saving User Rhythms you ve created using the Rhythm Customize function p 187 The content of User memory is retained even while the ATELIER s power is turned off You can call up Rhythms in User memory by pressing the User button Calling Up Rhythms Stored in User Memory l Press the User button The Rhythm screen appears Rhythm i J Sound KB 6 8 Ballad a 1 ADEN mere _ Trad Tango _ MarchingBand 2 Touch lt gt lt gt on the Rhythm screen to select User The Rhythms stored in user memory will be shown 3 Touch lt lt J to switch screens and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm The indicator of User button will blink 4 After selecting a Rhyt
58. and Playing Sounds The volume levels of each part are adjusted using the corresponding A and V buttons Pressing the upper button A button will increase the volume Pressing the lower button W button will decrease the volume The volume can be set to any value from O to 12 When the volume value shown in the display is O that part will produce no sound You can also press the A button or V button of the part whose volume you wish to adjust so that the Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for ia several seconds allowing you to check the volume balance MEMO The Part Balance Monitor screen is displayed for several 3 130 Part Balance Monitor CZD Ext seconds and then closes automatically i Sound KBD If you touch lt Hold gt the screen continues to be displayed until you touch lt Exit gt 63 spunos 6ulhe q pue Bulj9a 8S a ged ora ee Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units Octave Shift The pitch of the sound played by the keyboard can be adjusted in one octave steps This function is called Octave Shift You can apply an Octave shift to all Parts 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen i Biggest Band reed Orch Lower J Lower M Organ2 p Orch Organ Bass 2 Touch either lt Upper gt lt Lower gt or lt Pedal gt Menu Part whose pitch will change Upper To change the pi
59. appears 2 Touch lt gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt File Edit gt The Rhythm File Edit screen appears Rhythm File Edit 02 6 8 Ballad 03 Trad Tango Button Rename Up Down Delete Copy 94 Meaning Modify the name Change the order upward Change the order downward Delete the Rhythm Copies the Rhythm Description The Rename screen appears You can touch the screen and rename the selected Rhythm p 92 The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order p 90 The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order p 90 The selected Rhythm will be deleted You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory or copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory p 87 ENA Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose User if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in user memory or choose Ext Memory if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in USB memory Choose Disk if you want to delete the Rhythm saved in floppy disk Touch lt H lt to select the Rhythm that you wish to delete Touch lt Delete gt The following display appears Delete Rhythm OK Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm touch lt OK gt When a Rhythm is deleted the deleted Rhythm name will
60. appears Edit Menu Delete Measure Delete Track Quantize Rename 184 4 Touch lt Copy gt Edit Menu Delete Track Delete Measure Quantize Rename The Copy screen appears jan por hese ALL 5 Touch the Track value the track to be copied 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to set Track the track to be copied Track ALL RHYTHM ACCOMP BASS LOWER UPPER SOLO CONTROL If you select ALL the recording in all the tracks will be copied 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 8 Touch the From value the measure at which copying will begin urna Editing Your Musical Performance Data 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to set From the measure at which copying will begin 10 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 1 Touch the For value the number of measures to be copied 1 2 Touch lt gt lt gt to set For the number of measures to be copied If you want to specify all of the data up to the final measure select ALL 13 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 14 Touch the To value the copy destination measure number 1 5 Touch lt gt lt gt to set To the copy destination measure number If you select END the data will be copied following the end of the last measure 16 Wh
61. appears When opening a new Rhythm Customize screen Scroll Bar 14 This indicates the position of the current measure in the overall Rhythm 188 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms 2 Touch lt o gt Utility Selecting the Division The Utility screen appears What is the Division A song progresses in predictable a sequence such as intro melody A melody B bridge and ending With the ATELIER such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states We call these six parts of a song Divisions Division Performance division Intro The intro is played at the start of a song Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes Fill In To It is used to make a song more lively Variation oe After the phrase is played the variation s accompaniment pattern is played TE This is a developmental accompaniment Variation B o pattern It is a variation on an Original This is a phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes Fill In To i a It is used to make a song more sedate Original ae After the phrase is played the original s accompaniment pattern is played You can open the Division Select screen by touching the Ending This is played at the end ofa song MEMO Division name indication p 188 in the Rhythm Customize screen You can make a song more lively or more
62. are layering sounds of the same type e g Strings 1 and Strings 5 Alternatively you are playing an organ sound with Octave Shift This is not a malfunction Even though you press only one Harmony Intelligence is at ON Set Harmony Intelligence to OFF p 125 key a multiple number of notes 7 sound Chord Intelligence is set to ON Set Chord Intelligence to OFF p 80 Transpose is in effect Pitch is off The tuning is incorrect While set for an octave shift you are playing keys beyond the recommended range This does not indicate a malfunction Simultaneously press the Transpose buttons to cancel the transposition the Transpose buttons indicators will go oul p 117 Adjust the standard pitch p 210 Adjust the Octave Shift setting Some sounds do not allow the rotary Rotary effect is not be applied deee be applied This is not a malfunction 243 Troubleshooting Problem Check Some sounds do not allow the chorus see Chorus effect does not apply See Nebeapeicd This is not a malfunction The Part Balance volume of each part Press the Part Balance button to lower the 62 is too high volume P The Reverb volume has been raised when the volume of each Part Balance button is already raised Sound is distorted cracked The Bass Range Sounds Odd or There Is a Vibrating Resonance The volume level of the instrument connected to ATELI
63. change to M Z Rhythm File Edit 02 6 8 Ballad 03 Trad Tango Down 04 MarchingBand e Delete __ 09 Bg Copy _ 7 Using Rhythm Performance 95 SOURWUOLed WyMyy Buisn aa Using the Registration Buttons The ATELIER allows you to store sound settings and panel settings in the Registration buttons The ATELIER has a total of eight Registration buttons and one set of panel settings can be registered to each button for a total of eight types of panel settings Each set of panel settings that has been stored in a Registration button is called a Registration This provides a convenient way to change large numbers of panel settings during a performance or to recall a complex panel setting About the Registration Buttons 96 In addition to assigning voices and Rhythms to the Registration buttons you can also store the following settings e Panel button settings for example settings for the Level A V buttons and Solo To Lower button etc e Controller settings functions assigned to foot switches pitch bend range etc e Other types of settings reverb type tempo settings degree of initial touch etc If you would like to know all of the settings that can be recorded to the Registration buttons refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons p 253 The eight settings stored at the Registration buttons can be saved as a set in USB
64. confirm the voice by touching lt Exit gt in the Others Voice Other Voice select screen You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting 61 spunos 6ulhe q pue Bulj9a 8S Eii or 00 Selecting and Playing Sounds Adjust the Volume Balance The ATELIER allows you to adjust the volume balance individually for each Part Organ Orchestral Accomp Revert SMF Rhythm pmm o Lower Lower Ci CJ CU E g A L fo J i Pipe ENG ce a Alternate Alternate Part Balance Lower Alternate Harmony Intelligence Alternate Alternate To Lower Upper Solo The following buttons are used to adjust the volume of a multiple number of pao M EMO Parts You can use the Solo part s harmonic bar to adjust the Button Part volume of the Solo part Automatic Accompaniment except Bass Accomp SMF A V button Playback of performance songs from something other than the ATELIER performance songs for example SMF music files Rhythm A V button When the Manual Percussion Manual percussion button is ON Rhythm A V button Rhythm performance When the Manual Percussion button is OFF Drums SFX Pedal part voice Pedal Level A V button Bass note of Automatic Accompaniment 62 Ooo 0 00 9g TTT I i E TT I ewes ceo Beers B o mmm op yy He BEES oe stim Selecting
65. cord correctly connected to the AC inlet e s the power cord correctly connected to the AC outlet e Is the Master Volume slider located at the left of the Lower Keyboard set to the Min minimum position Witt Volume 2 Press the Power On switch to turn on the power Lower position Power On ON The main screen will appear in the display Main Screen 232 Gos HSE oom O E This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally 22 3 Adjust the volume to an appropriate level by moving the Master Volume slider or operating the expression pedal Now adjust the Master Volume slider to a suitable level The volume will be increased when the Expression Pedal is pressed down and decreased when the pedal is returned N decrease r the volume the volume f decrease 7 increase the volume Master the volume Volume Turning Off the Power 1 Before switching the power off set the Master Volume slider to the Min minimum position 2 Press the Power On switch to turn off the power C Upper position Power On OFF If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the Power On switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet Refer to Power Supply p 6 Before You Start Playing Using Headphones The ATELIER fea
66. format in which the data will be saved Loading Performance Songs You can select either Original or SMF format Into the ATELIER Display Description Original Save data in ATELIER format To edit p 179 or re record a performance song that is stored SMF Saving in SMF Format for ATELIER Sound Modules on a USB memory or floppy disk you must first load that song into the instrument 9 Touch lt OK gt to finalize the save format Saving of the performance data will begin I Prepare the performance song If you want to load performance song to a USB memory Performance data saved by the ATELIER cannot be played 4 P J X back properly by the sound generator of an instrument that connect the USB memory to the External Memory is not a member of the ATELIER series connector Saving performance data in SMF format SMF requires a If you want to load performance song to a floppy disk longer time than saving it in ATELIER format Original connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector Into the floppy disk drive insert a floppy disk that was If the Following Screen Appears formatted by the ATELIER E EE EE EE EE EE EE EE E EE E E E D O O e e o O o O e O e e e E e e E e If you select a number at which a performance data has already 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen been saved and touch lt Save gt the following screen appears The Rec Play screen appears 3 Touch lt MSB gt Utility T
67. g The Division Options screen appears Q Touch lt Exit gt The Division Options screen reappears F Division Options Changing the Volume EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE E E E E o O O o O E e O E e O O eee 6 8 LU Be 10 Touch the Volume setting 4 4 F3 Division Options EE Volume mn ETSA Registration S 1 1 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 1 2 Touch lt Exit gt The Division Options screen reappears suuAyy puowiueduwosoy eulIBUO Hueso 191 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms m Creating the User Rhythm Editing the Rhythm Edit the internal Rhythm What you can do Page Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p 192 Deleting the Rhythm in a Selected Measure p 192 Erasing Sounds p 193 Adding Sounds p 193 Altering Voices p 194 Changing the Velocity p 194 Moving Sounds p 194 Copying the Rhythm in a Selected Measure 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 2 Touch lt Copy gt to copy the selected measure a Customize 4 4 asi le Std Close HH eo ee0e00068080 E E Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock The following screen appears Rhythm Customize 4 4 on EES Copy 0K measure 1 to 2 Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 3 Touch lt OK gt Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure 192 Deleting t
68. gt Oo O 5 Q O D o Ayesso 5 An effect that smoothly raises or lowers the pitch Registration A set of data that specifies the state of the instrument when performing including sounds and panel settings Reverb An effect that simulates the reverberation of a room or concert hall Root Note The root note is the basis of a chord All chords are built on a root note which is the part of the chord name given in uppercase letters Rotary An effect which simulates the modulation given to the sound when a rotating speaker is used The Rotary effect produces two types of modulation fast or slow Sound Generator This is the section that produces the sound The ATELIER series uses a sound generator that is compatible with GM2 GS Split A function which allows the keyboard to be divided into two or more areas and a different sound assigned to each area The point at which the keyboard is divided is called the Split Point Sustain An effect that adds a decay to each note The ATELIER allows sustain to be applied to the voices of the upper part lower part and pedal part Vibrato An effect that cyclically modulates the pitch Voice The ATELIER is able to produce the sounds of various instruments These sounds are called Voices 251 Music Files That the ATELIER Can Use What Are Music Files Music files contains musical information such as how long the key for a corresponding pitc
69. gt Touch lt Load gt Since the ATELIER is designed The Registration data will start being load with compatibility in mind Registrations created on other instruments in the ATELIER reappear series can be recalled However due to differences in the built in sounds and functions there will be cases in which the settings cannot be exactly replicated When the Registration has been loaded the Registration Load screen will If you want to load a Registration from USB memory connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector If you want to load a Registration from a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen MEMO The Registration Load screen appears Yoi camalsaopen me Registration Load screen by p7 pressing the Registration AA Registration Load button fd Sound KBD 03 REGIST 03 CA Registration 04 REGIST 04 S 02 REGIST 02 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk select Disk If you want to load from the Registration of user memory select User 107 suong uolejsibey y BusN Using the Registration Buttons 6 7 108 i to select the R
70. instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly WARNING Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse deg caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Se eee ees eee E eee err ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING Do not disassemble or modify Do not disassemble or modify this device Do not repair or replace parts Never attempt to repair this device or replace parts If repair or part replacement should become S necessary you must contact your dealer or a Roland service center Do not use or store in the following types of locations e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heatgenerating equipment or are Tr e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Exposed to steam or smoke or are e Subject to salt exposure or are e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or sandy or are e Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness Do not place in an unstable location Do not place this device on an unstable stand or a tilted surface You must place it in a stable and level location Connect the power cord to an outlet of the correct voltage You must
71. leant Play Stop button Recording Playing Back What You Play m The performance data you recorded can be saved on a USB MEMO u n a lama memory Favorites or floppy disk p 169 Commercially sold music files can also be loaded into the ATELIER but for reasons of copyright protection cannot be saved in SMF format Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song 1 Prepare the performance data whose tempo you want to change If you re using performance data from USB memory connect it to the External Memory connector If you re using performance data from a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk 2 Load the performance data into the unit p 170 e Determine the tempo with the Tempo lt 4 gt buttons 4 Hold down the panel Reset button and press the Rec button The tempo of the performance data will change You cannot carry out this operation with lt Reset gt and lt Rec gt in the Rec Play screen 173 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike 4 6ulpsooey Recording Playing Back What You Play Bt cata Re Recording Part of Your Performance Punch in Recording After you have recorded a performance you can re record a specitied portion of the performance With this method you listen to the recorded performance and re record just the desired area This recording method is cal
72. memory a floppy disk or user memory p 103 In addition to the settings saved to the Registration buttons the following data is also saved when Registration sets are saved e Registration Name gt p 101 e Registration Shift gt p 122 e Arranger Update gt p 99 Trans Update Transpose Update gt p 205 Exp Curve Expression Curve gt p 124 Rhythm Mode setting gt p 203 With the factory settings the Arranger Update setting is set to DELAYED If Arranger Update is set to DELAYED you will need to hold down the Registration button for several seconds in order to recall the tempo and Rhythm settings If you want the tempo and Rhythm settings to be recalled instantly when you press a Registration button change the Arranger Update setting to INSTANT For details refer to Recalling a Registration p 98 MEMO Settings that have been stored to Registration buttons 1 8 are remembered even if the power is turned off If you wish to restore the settings stored in the Registration buttons to their factory settings use the Factory Reset operation p 24 MEMO Recorded performance data and Rhythms from User memory p 72 are not stored in Registration sets When a Rhythm saved in User memory is assigned to a Registration set that Rhythm is copied beforehand to the User memory Using the Registration Buttons Procedure for Creating Registration Sets Prepare the Re
73. n 151 Este simbolo indica que en los paises de la Union Europea este producto debe recogerse aparte de los residuos dom sticos tal como est regulado en cada zona Los productos con este simbolo no se deben depositar con los residuos dom sticos Este s mbolo indica que nos pa ses da UE a recolha deste produto dever ser feita separadamente do lixo dom stico de acordo com os regulamentos de cada regi o Os produtos que apresentem este s mbolo n o dever o ser eliminados juntamente com o lixo dom stico Dit symbool geeft aan dat in landen van de EU dit product gescheiden van huishoudelijk afval moet worden aangeboden zoals bepaald per gemeente of regio Producten die van dit symbool zijn voorzien mogen niet samen met huishoudelijk afval worden verwijderd Dette symbol angiver at i EU lande skal dette produkt opsamles adskilt fra husholdningsaffald som defineret i hver enkelt region Produkter med dette symbol m ikke smides ud sammen med husholdningsaffald Dette symbolet indikerer at produktet m behandles som spesialavfall i EU land iht til retningslinjer for den enkelte regionen og ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall Produkter som er merket med dette symbolet ma ikke kastes sammen med vanlig husholdningsavfall 0 0000 608068090 Symbolen anger att i EU l nder m ste den h r produkten kasseras separat fr n hush llsavfall i enlighet med varje regions best mmelser Produkter med den h r symbole
74. notes to be played on the Pedalboard p 198 MEMO If you press the Pedal To Lower button indicator lights or Bass Split is ON the Pedal Bass voice can now be played by the Lower keyboard not by the Pedalboard For details refer to Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Bass Split p 149 or Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Pedal To Lower Button p 152 49 spunos 6bulAe g pue Burjo9ajes Selecting and Playing Sounds Be BEE ows Selecting Solo Voice 50 The Solo section of the Upper keyboard is monophonic that is the Solo voice will only sound for the highest note played on the Upper keyboard This allows you to play full chords and have the selected Solo voice playing the highest solo note Example Selecting Trumpet for the Solo part cj gt Alternate To Lower LI Solo Press the Solo Trumpet button indicator lights The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds SSI Trumpet Play the Upper keyboard The selected voice will sound by the highest note played When you press the Alternate button the two voices assigned to the button will alternate oomo a TTT ALAA M EMO You can use the Solo part s harmonic bar to adjust the volume of the Solo part p 62 MEMO By pressing the Solo To Lower button you can play the Solo voice from
75. numbers 2 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices like this uppercase gt connector The System screen appears numbers gt uppercase 3 In the System screen touch lt Utility gt 7 Touch the screen to specify the desired Tr character T The following characters can be selected 4 soar Uppercase ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQRSTU VWXYZ La Symbols 0123456789 Del Deletes a character Move the cursor the symbol that indicates gt the location at which characters will be input to left or right 4 Touch lt DiskToExtMem gt To cancel the operation touch lt Cancel gt The following screen appears 8 When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt All songs and registrations on the disk The folder name has been assigned will be copied to a newly created folder The following screen appears in external memory Please enter a name for the folder Duplication of music data for any purpose other than personal enjoyment without permission from the copyright owner is forbidden by law If you decide to stop the data copy operation touch lt Cancel gt sBulljes 1 4 0 SNOEN 223 Various Other Settings 9 Touch lt OK gt The data from floppy disk will be copied to USB memory When the copy is completed a message will indicate Completed and you will return
76. of the best loved musical styles from around the world Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment patterns are built in allowing you to enjoy an international range of performances Utilizes SMF music files Compatible with General MIDI 2 the world standard in SMF music files Since an external memory connector is provided you can connect separately available USB memory or a floppy disk drive and take advantage of the wide range of commercially available SMF music files You can also mute parts allowing you to practice the part for each hand separately and enjoy performing ensemble with the music files Main Features Features Harmonic bars for creating organ sounds The organ is equipped with Harmonic bars which are much like the controllers used on traditional jazz organs By operating the harmonic bars you can easily create a diverse variety of organ sounds By using the solo harmonic bars you can add orchestral sounds to the organ sounds for even more expressive performance potential USB Memory You can connect separately sold USB memory or a floppy disk drive and play back SMF music files Performances you record or Registration data you create can also be saved on USB memory or a floppy disk or you can save SMF music files or Registrations from USB memory or a floppy disk into internal user memory Quick Registration and Music Assistant functions The Quick Registration function lets you use keywords to sele
77. or subject to strong impact Do not drop this device or subject it to strong S impact Do not use overseas If you wish to use this device overseas please contact your dealer or a service center Do not use a CD ROM in an audio CD player or DVD player If you attempt to play back a CD ROM in a conventional audio CD player or DVD player the resulting high S volume may damage your hearing or your speakers Do not place containers of water on the device Do not place containers of water such as a flower vase or drinks on the device Nor should you place containers of insecticide perfume alcoholic liquids nail polish or spray cans on the device Liquids that spill into the device may cause it to malfunction and may cause short circuits or faulty operation CAUTION Place in a well ventilated location a well ventilated location When using this device ensure thot it is placed in f Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting the power cord When connecting or disconnecting the power cord to from an AC outlet or the device itself you must grasp the plug not the cord Periodically wipe the dust off the power cord plug From time to time you should unplug the power cord from the AC outlet and use a dry cloth to wipe the dust off of it You should also unplug the power cord from the AC outlet if you will not be using the device for an extended period of time Dust or dirt that accumulates between
78. possible because the storage media does not have enough space Please use other storage media that has been formatted by the ATELIER Unknown Media This storage media cannot be used Please format it Media Ejected The storage media was disconnected while it was being accessed Please try the operation again Damaged Media A damaged area was found on the storage media Can t Read This data cannot be read Playback was halted because the song could not be read fast enough Can t Play The song could not be read from the storage media fast enough for playback Press the Reset button then press the Play Stop button once again There is no Rhythm in user memory No Rhythm Designated positions are incorrect Memory Full MIDI Buffer Full Communication Error A MIDI transmission error has occurred Memory Error Not found The Rhythm used by the selected Registration was deleted from user memory or its order was changed When calibrating the touch panel the appropriate point was not touched correctly If you touch a location other than the specified point the discrepancy may become severe Please be sure to touch the correct point The song data is excessively large and cannot be loaded The performance data is excessively large and cannot be loaded Recording or editing is not possible because the memory of the ATELIER is full The ATELIER cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MID
79. setting is on the slide show will be shown on your external display 4 Touch lt Exit gt strane Various Other Seting Do this carefully because touching a location that s different Repositioning the Touch Screen from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse Be sure to touch the pointer If you ve been using the Touch Screen for some time the accurately If the following display appears perform the pointer may be shifted making the ATELIER react incorrectly touch panel position adjustment once again You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration repositioning 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen A arenes The System screen appears are incorrect 2 Inthe System screen touch lt Utility gt The Utility screen appears Close A display will ask for confirmation To cancel the operation touch lt Cancel gt 4 Touch lt OK gt on the screen 9 Touch the points indicated on the touch screen sBulles 194 0 SNOEN 217 faton Ot so Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings You can restore the User memory to their original factory settings This function is called User Memory Reset What is User Memory User Memory refers to an area inside the instrument where you can store the User Rhythms you create and the T nae The confirmation message appears on scree
80. steps 0 8 and you can layer the sound of multiple harmonic bars Various pitches can be combined for the Lower keyboard in the same way as for the Upper keyboard The harmonic bar for the Solo part will adjust the volume of the voice selected for the Solo part When you move the Solo part s harmonic bar the Solo part s level indicator will also change 55 Selecting and Playing Sounds Adding Sparkle to the Sound Percussion This adds an attack sound to the beginning of the note making the sound crisper 3 Press the Percussion 4 button or 2 2 3 button indicator lit Play the Upper keyboard and notice that an attack has been added Percussion Fast Decay Button Description Percussion 4 button Percussion one octave above Percussion 2 2 3 button Percussion one octave and a fifth above Adjusting the Rate at which the Percussion Decays You can shorten the decay time of the percussion sound 4 Press the Percussion Fast Decay button to switch the indicator between lit unlit Percussion A Fast Decay 4 2 LOJEN Fast Decay Button Description Lit The percussion sound will disappear quickly The percussion will have a sharper attack The percussion sound will disappear slowly The percussion will have a more gentle attack Unlit 56 Percussion 4 and 2 2 31 buttons cannot be used simultaneously The Percussion 4 button and Percussion
81. the Depth of the Expression Pedal cccccccccccceeseeeececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaene sees 124 Applying Various Effects to the Sound sssscccssssssccssssssrecsssssereees 125 Adding Harmony to a Melody Harmony Intelligence cccceceeccccceseeeeeeeesaeeeeesesaaeeeeees 125 Changing the Harmony Intelligence Type cccceccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaas 126 Adding Modulation to the Sound Rotary Effect cccccccccccceeeseeeeeeceeeesseeeseeeeeessaeeseeeeees 128 Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed Rotary Speed ccccceeeeeees 129 Changing the Brightness of the Rotary Effect Rotary Color cccccccceeeeeesseeeeeeeees 130 Adding Richness to the Sound Chorus Effect cccccccccccccceeeeeeeececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeaeaeeseeeeees 131 Adding Resonance to the Sound Sustain Effect ccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeceeseseeeeeeeeseeseaeeseeeeees 133 Changing the Sustain LENG than accsides ocho eens Stinks aaa oUt anh ag Mdcdianeldacsdenaiahiets 135 Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb Effect cccccccccccsssececccceeesseeeseeeeeessaeeseeeeees 136 CNGNGING NE Reverb Type assina aTa as Gash siete eae uses ee aa 137 Changing the Wal Type iceniiees s a E op ee eter ee ne eee 138 Changing the Depth of the ReVerb s c wisest echoed ees eencee tres 139 Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment cccccccccesseececceeeees
82. the receiving MIDI instrument to play sounds or switch voices The ATELIER contains two sound generators one sound generator for its own keyboards and one GM2 GS sound generator p 252 Normally musical data transmitted from an external device to the MIDI In connector is sent to the GM2 GS sound generator but you can also set the MIDI IN Mode parameter p 212 so that the keyboard sound generator is controlled Making the Connections When connecting turn on power to your various devices in the order specified Failure to follow these steps in the order NOTE given could cause a malfunction and or damage to speakers or other equipment 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the device you re about to connect 2 Switch off the power to the ATELIER and the device you re about to connect 3 Use a MIDI cable sold separately to connect the MIDI connectors to each other 4 Switch on the power to the ATELIER and the connected device 9 Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected device 6 You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed p 213 231 d eUJe1Xy UM Hunosuu0D Connecting with External Device Connecting an External Display RGB Out Display Cable commercial available External Display Displays That Can Be Connected to This Making the Connections Instrument To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other NOTE
83. to the System screen If the floppy disk drive or USB memory is not connected correctly a screen like the following will appear The floppy disk or external memory is not connected correctly 224 Video related Settings Selecting the Type of Slide Show You can specify how transitions between images are to occur when you play back a slide show p 236 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt Utility gt 42130 a J Sound KBD 4V Rec Play CA Registration man 3 Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt The VIMA TUNES screen appears S1 VIMA TUNES In the Mood d 130 Video M Playback Transpose Melody 44 Rec PI ia In SMF QA Registration coma 4 Touch lt Options gt The Video Option screen appears Video Options ee 3 Slide Show Type MIX ae 0 Rec Play Slide Show Interval 8 seconns a n Various Other Settings Baki M 1 J Sound KBD So 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description One photo will simply fade out while the next photo fades in SIMPLE The photo will be divided into blocks that BLOCK change separately The photo will switch using rapid POP ae movement and color combination MIX Simple block and pop types will be combined 7 Touch lt Exit gt Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change You can spe
84. will be applied to the sound Effective range of the D Beam controller The illustration at right shows the effective range of the D Beam controller Moving your hand outside this range will not produce any effect The effective range of the D Beam controller will be drastically decreased under strong direct sunlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors Tornmgi ine eon 3 Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off MEMO When the Pitch Filter or Volume button for the D Beam is lit in green the sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play when you move your hand above the D Beam controller p 142 The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will vary according to the brightness of its surroundings If it does not operate as you expect you can readjust the sensitivity Increasing the D Beam sensitivity value p 201 will make it more sensitive 141 punos y 0 O9JJ Snowe Bulsjddy Be BEE ows Appying Various Elects to the Sound EAN Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect You can produce various sound effects simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller on the panel NF D Beam Pitch Filter Volume FJ 5 EE 1 Press either the Pitch Filter or Volume button for the D Beam so the button is lit in green Button Description MEMO 7 i When the Pi
85. you will return to the Rec Play screen 4 If you touch lt OK gt the performance data will be erased 167 Keig no 24M yorg Bulhe q Bulpiooey a Recording Playing Back What You Play ui 3 Touch lt Save Delete gt The Song Save Song Delete screen appears Song Save Song Delete Li 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 04 ATELIER 04 4 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears Song Save Song Delete Li 9 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears B J 130 aM 4J Rec Play QA Registration 5 6 Touch the character select button O ABC abo D to switch among uppercase lowercase symbols Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices like this uppercase gt lowercase gt symbols gt uppercase 168 7 Touch the screen to specify the desired character The following characters can be selected U ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU ppercase wry v7 Lowercase abcdefghijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz I HE amp 2 _01234 Symbols 56789 Del Deletes a character Inserts a space blank Space ore To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt Move the cursor the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input to left or right 8 When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt
86. 00 x 480 dots backlit color LCD with touch screen Damper Pedal Expression Pedal Foot Switch 2 pcs function assignable Audio Output Jacks L mono R Audio Input Jacks L mono R Video Output Jacks Analog RGB Phones Jacks stereo x 2 Mic Input Jack MIDI Connectors In Out USB Jack External Memory Connector USB Memory connector Ext Drive Connector AC Inlet AC 117 V 230 V 240 V 120 W Simulated Dark Walnut 1 242 W x 653 D x 550 H mm A48 15 16 W x 25 3 4 D x 21 11 16 H inchess 1 235 W x 599 D x 755 H mm A8 5 8 W x 23 5 8 D x 29 3 4 H inches 1 242 W x 653 D x 1 264 H mm A8 15 16 W x 25 3 4 D x 49 13 16 H inches Console 58 5 kg 129 lbs Stand 49 5 kg 110 lbs Total 108 kg 239 lbs Console included Music Rest Stand Total Music Rest Screw for the Music Rest x 2 Knob Bolt x 2 Cord Hook Panel Sheet Power Cord Owner s Manual Voice amp Rhythm Guide Bench Stereo Headphones USB Memory USB Floppy Disk Drive FD O1A CD Drive Holder DH 01 Microphone In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 259 Index A Active EXpression Voice 5 4 ciad Sond colic nuten eeodsddansd 59 PLEX VOICES aunts aces ar ARN 59 Alie ao a en aes rR Oe es Fe ee 47 Arrangement seier tac erae ent head aio 251 Amanger UNCON sierran inn tate eesti 78 Arranger Update seseetrtaectni
87. 13 Manual Percussion Track Button Solo Pedal Lower Upper Accomp Rhythm The Track Mute button 16 cannot be used with performance data created on an ATELIER 159 Keig no 24M yorg Bulhe q Bulpiooey O ae x Displaying Notations Viewing g Notation eoeeeeeeoeeeoeoeeoeoeeeoee eee e eee eee 8 8 8 ee 6 Touch lt DigiScore gt on the Rec Play screen The Notation screen appears Recording Playing Back What You Play You can display the notations of performances from SMF music files and recordings made on the ATELIER This is very convenient when you want to read the music as you play and Fur Elise to confirm recorded songs Selecting Songs gt There is no need to select the song when displaying notations for performances recorded with the Composer eee Start from Step 6 N Exit Bass Lower Upper 1 Prepare the USB memory or floppy disk that contains the song for which you want to view the notation Display Description If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory connect your USB memory to the External a Enlarge the notation display Memory connector before you continue If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy Display lyrics in the notation disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert a floppy disk into the drive Baas Display the Bass part notation 2 Press the Song button The S
88. 203 MEMO For more on the Variation buttons refer to Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment p 79 75 vuewIou d Uyyy Buisn a Using Rhythm Performance Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard Sync Start Starting with an Added Intro 1 Press the Sync Start button to make the indicator light up 2 Press the Intro Ending button The Intro Ending button s indicator will light If the Arranger function is ON the Arranger On Off button indicator is lit it is not be able While the Intro is playing the Intro Ending button indicator will light until to start the Rhythm by playing the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark the pedalboard p 78 3 Play either the Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts Starting Without an Intro 1 Press the Sync Start button to make the indicator light up 2 Play either the Lower keyboard or the pedalboard The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played Making the Intro Short and Simple 1 Press the Sync Start button to make the indicator light up MEMO For more on the Variation button refer to Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic 3 Press the Intro Ending button Accompaniment p 79 Intro Ending button indicator will blink 2 Press the Variation 1 button 4 Play either th
89. 34 Husn Using the Performance Functions Adjusting the Depth of the Expression Pedal You can set the amount of effect applied when you step on the expression pedal 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears 3 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Exp Curve Expression Curve 4 Touch lt Exp Curve gt setting ejanuae lisia 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description The position of the expression pedal does not really affect the Rhythm performances and Automatic Accompaniment This setting is convenient when you do not want to have the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment volume change much The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance 2 The volume is easily adjusted according to the angle of the expression pedal making this setting perfect for use in songs with big changes in dynamics The expression pedal is applied to the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment just as it is to the keyboard performance The expression affect is applied more gently than with Setting 2 so this setting is appropriate for quieter songs with less intense dynamic changes The expression pedal does not affect the Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment at all 4 This setting is sui
90. 7b5 Fm7b5 STEED EE EE REMITE UCT TTY COTTA CERI Ey MILT Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug ALTEN CEST LECUPEE TTY LETS CEPT COST Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 ATEU EELEE Let set On EELEE PE CERISE PPE LAE C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 MAATEN ELEAN EE TY Oo er ETEEN CETTE C 6 D6 Eb6 E6 N E EHTEL EY E T CTE C m6 Dm6 Eb m6 FE E E n ARETE YS S17 P4049 249 Chord List symbol Indicates the constituent not of chord symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the xe F maj7 Gmaj7 Abmaj7 Amaj7 Bb maj7 Bmaj7 F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 B7 M PRYL i PEMEAN ETLAT ITE CELTE MELET OO ed F m Gm Abm Am Bb m Bm RN COURSE EE EELE OES PED AN F m7 Gm7 Abm7 Am7 Bb m7 Bm7 E LA ETN ALE ELEAN AN F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim PETRUS EET EN E REAN CP ECE OY EELT NN OO aY F m7b5 Gm7b5 Abm7b5 Am7b5 Bb m7b5 Bm7 b5 T AN F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb aug Baug F sus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 OS TT AN ee CT A F 6 Ab6 A6 Bb6 B6 MEE E E E FETE F m6 Abm6 Bbm6 PENR EE EE E A R 250 Glossary Arrangement This refers to changes that have been made in an original tune by adding a new accompaniment or by changing the instruments used Automatic Accompaniment Automatic Accompaniment is Automatic Accompaniment when just a few keys in the lower section of the keyboard are pressed to specify t
91. A Fill In Auto button a Variation button to change the accompaniment or MEMO Rhythm arrangement You can change the behavior of the Fill In Auto button and Fill In Break button Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure Break Fill In Break button p 203 ill In Break button p What s a fill in A Fill In is a short phrase that is inserted at a break in the melody or at a point where the character of the song changes between Chorus s or Verses Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment Variation You can change the arrangement of the accompaniment This function is called Variation For each Rhythm there are four types of arrangement for the accompaniment The following buttons are called Variation buttons Deal Wh ia i G Variation Press the Variation buttons to change the arrangement of the accompaniment The indicator of the button you pressed will light The Variation 1 button produces the simplest arrangement and the Variation 4 button produces the most florid For an intro or ending Variation 1 button is the shortest and simplest 79 SsoUBWWOLeg Uyyy Buisn a tn Pc all Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence is a feature that intelligently plays the correct accompaniment chords the moment you play a key specifying a chord on the MEMO Lower keyboard during Automatic Accompaniment For more in
92. Customize 4 4 nsa _ 8 EB oF JERN ees _Stapd1 Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro mY m You can open Instrument Edit screen using the M EMO following procedure 1 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 2 Touch lt Inst Edit gt Instrument Edit The Instrument Edit screen appears Changing the Instrument Used 3 Touch lt H lt in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to change 4 Touch lt Change gt The following screen appears Instrument Change Std Close HH gt IARA omn CC a Sinn freon G 5 Touch lt K gt lt gt to switch the screen then touch the instrument name The following screen appears i pece To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 6 Ifyou want to change the instrument touch lt OK gt The instrument is changed Deleting an Instrument You can delete an instrument used in a Rhythm When an instrument is deleted all of the sounds using that instrument are deleted from the Rhythm gt lt B in the screen to select the name of the instrument you want to delete 8 Touch lt Delete gt on the Instrument Edit screen A Delete Instrument 0K Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 9 If you are sure that you wish to delete the instrument touch lt OK gt The selected instrument is delet
93. E E 157 Muting Individual Tracks of Performance Datd ccccccccccccceeseeeeeeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 159 Viewing CIN OIG O M eoan eaa e E et ea EEE tes anteaters tie tataceaten N cas ee 160 Changing th Notation Settings cscs aona EE E E E EEE E 161 RECON Perlor mande Scacchi a e E a EA 163 Playing Backa Perionmance Song erresisten A EAE a 164 Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing Count In cccccccccseeccceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeessaeeeeees 164 Recording Each Part Separately sic seiehccassscedoshioeitand Maciek Sedan stsk eel codidetiashdasaeeauheaases 165 RE RECONCNG eai i ee a heed ea e a a a A 166 Erasing a Performance Song Song Clear xssense wate ees Gh ee ee 167 Changing the Name of a Performance Song Rename s ssesssssinessssssriiesesssrireeesssrrresss 167 Saving Performance Songs eiiosinna ee a A E RN 169 Loading Performance Songs Into the ATELIER 0cccccccccceeeeeeeececeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaens 171 Deleting Performance Songs Stored on Favorites or the USB Memory cccccceceeeeeeeeeees 172 Layering a New Recording onto SMF Music Files ccccccecseccceeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaneees 173 Using Song with a Different Tempo Than That of the Performance Song c0ccceceeeeeee eee 174 Re Recording Part of Your Performance Punch in Recording cccccseeeccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 174 Recording and Layering Drum Parts Loop Recording ccccc
94. ER is too low Pressing the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data produces a crackling noise The Master Volume slider has been used to raise the overall volume excessively When listening through speakers Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the ATELIER to resonate Resonance can also occur with fluorescent light tubes glass doors and other objects In particular this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased and when the sound is played at higher volumes When listening through headphones Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the ATELIER would be suspect The expression pedal function is set to PEDAL COMPOSER during playback of ATELIER performance data When this setting is used moving the expression pedal while playing back ATELIER performance data may create a difference between the expression pedal information in the performance data and the volume as set with the expression pedal which can result in this kind of sound being produced Registrations do not Switch Correctly Problem The Rhythm or Tempo does not change when you press the Registration buttons 244 The settings at which Registrations are recalled Registration Arranger Update has been set to DELAYED Either lower the Reverb volume or adjust the Part Balance of each part Use the Master Volume slider to lower the overall volume
95. I device Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the ATELIER A MIDI cable or computer cable has been disconnected Connect it properly and securely The ATELIER is unable to handle the data that was sent Please send data that the ATELIER is able to handle Data transfer failed Please transfer the data again An error occurred in internal memory Please perform the operation again If this indication appears even after you ve repeated the operation several times please contact Roland service A Rhythm or Registration that meets the conditions was not found This is Registration data of a type that is not supported The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current 248 This instrument cannot use this Registration USB memory not supported by the ATELIER was connected This USB memory cannot be used with the ATELIER Chord List symbol Indicates the constituent not of chord symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the xe gt Oo 5 Q O D o C C D Eb E F Cmaj7 C maj7 Dmaj7 Eb maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7 METEN HEE AH Letter Pr CAE EEE LH UIT TRL T LTS I lt C 7 D7 Eb7 TEE E E E T R Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm ALMUEN EE AHTH UEEEE EELEE LEE LEEREN LPT PE ET Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 APIE COLES PRY ELE aet ETLI ITH CARE PETE Cdim C dim Ddim Eb dim Edim Fdim ATEEN EERTE Uist PITH EELER LA Ls et TT LPP eT Cm7b5 C m7b5 Dm7b5 Ebm7b5 Em
96. IDI spiteri sia e 252 General MIDI 2 erreira tds oeeetut caine lisantaere 252 NOE cups seit aides acai E E 121 251 Oaa A O ES 252 GS Formak ca sates tates ae aA A 252 H Harmony Intelligence cccccccceseeecceeeeeeeeeees 125 HBa Manual eit dude Orch team clade suceteudeaned ie 57 EGA DNOMES ersada ian oxtahastcuandes eects 23 HUMAN VOCE wees aE gists dan cases E 60 Initial Touch Sensitivity cccccceeseeseceeseeeeeeees 198 POT settee E tated taces 227 TO eene trang tent cua bata esa 25 VEION ahasoree lors dice ssc heee AE 25 K Key PGMS DOSe saron N mene 117 L LEGGING BASS sismes E 82 121 Load Individual Registration ccccceceeeeceeeee ences 107 Performance SONGS sox 22s 5 Sawsccresctiaesenntuesicneats 17 Set of REGISHGNONS x gssnG2eerewsnsceeie cas danans 106 LOOP REGCOFAING imeen o R 175 lower Foliar T E 70 Lower Vole essaie A E A 48 DIOS eoe n EEE EEEL EA 206 M AE E ERE E A ta EEEE AE E E A 227 MOM SCRE Mi aasan r 29 BGGKOIOUNG eacee ar n de eeenadennca 214 BOUNCING Ball sensers na 214 Manual Percussion isicicninin a i 68 Manual Percussion Sets csccsececescesceseeseeceecs 69 Master Tune eeeeecececeeeccccecsctceeescenecteees 210 Master Volume ccceececcecceceecescescuseuseusesencs 22 Measure Ee E E T A eek ere Nene eer ener 184 Dele ae eee en TC ree 179 MENON OME 252caGchGl bicihs ds Ses a a mes aaiextes 207 Metronome Beat l
97. JKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZabcdefghijklmnopaqrstuvwx yzZO123456789 amp r_ If you use a character that cannot be used in a name it will be replaced by another character when displayed Using your computer save the image that you want to load into the ATELIER on external media Connect the external media containing the image to the ATELIER If you re using USB memory connect it to the External Memory connector If you re using a floppy disk connect the separately purchased floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears In the System screen touch lt Utility gt Disk ToExtMem VIMA TUNES Various Other Settings 6 Touch lt BMP Installer gt The BMP Installer screen appears lt BMP Installer Lll 02 Blank 03 Blank Display Description Images stored in internal memory 01 03 For numbers at which no image is saved Blank is shown The image stored in the ATELIER will be shown View for a few seconds allowing you to check the image Load an image from external media into internal Load memory Clear Delete an image from internal memory The ATELIER can store up to three images If two or more MEMO images are stored in internal memory those images will be g displayed consecutively after the power is turned on 7 Inthe screen touch lt 01 gt lt 03 gt to select the destinat
98. List Ralf Schink Ralf Schink was born in Germany and began playing the electronic organ at the age of 9 After completing his formal education Ralf went on to study at the renowned Swiss Jazz School in Bern Switzerland as well as the Berklee College of Music in Boston Since then his energetic contemporary style has won him many accolades throughout Europe and around the world Ralf regularly performs at the Frankfurt Musik Messe the largest musical fair in Europe A tremendously versatile and gifted musician Ralf is comfortable with all types of music From pop to jazz Ralf s repertoire appeals to all age groups Since 1992 Ralf has been working and touring for Roland Europe as demonstrator and product consultant He regularly tours Europe Asia and Canada Ric lannone Ric lannone began playing the piano and accordion at the age of two and a half By the time he was seven he was performing public and private engagements with his musician father For more than 20 years Ric has performed and traveled extensively throughout the United States and Europe delighting audiences with his unique playing style and music arrangements He is equally comfortable playing the organ piano or keyboard as a concert artist and product demonstrator Yuri Tachibana 256 Although Yuri Tachibana began playing the piano at age 3 she switched completely to the organ after winning First Prize in an organ competition She has expanded her work to include
99. Lower iol Hl Upper Each time you press a voice button its indicator will switch between being lit and being turned off Voices that have their button indicator lit can be played Two voices of the same family are assigned to each voice button Buttons with voices from two different families have the names of both voices printed on them The Alternate button switches between these two voices Alternate button Voice that will be selected Lit The voice indicated on the button is selected Another voice of the same category as the voice shown on the button will be selected Unlit For buttons to which voices of the same category are not assigned the voice printed below the button will be selected Selecting and Playing Sounds NOTE No sounds are produced even when the keys are played when the Voice button is unlit and all vintage organ voices are off 47 spunos 6bulAe g pue BuljoajeS a Selecting and Playing Sounds Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices Press the Organ or Orchestral buttons for each Keyboard Upper Lower MEMO to select the desired voice The lower voice can be When the power is turned on the Upper keyboard will play Full Organ1 e eaea in he sdmevay asme upper voice and the Lower keyboard will play Lower Organ3 Example Selecting ComboJazzOrg for the Upper Organ and Grand Piano for the Upper Orchestral 1 Press the Upper Org
100. MIDI Out connector 3 Touch the V LINK setting OFF MODE 1 when one of the twelve rightmost keys in the Lower MODE keyboard is pressed In this case the Lower and Solo MIDI transmit channel settings are disregarded and the messages are 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting transmitted via Channel 16 Setting Description The MIDI transmit channel used for video control messages is fixed at channel 16 OFF The V LINK function is switched off The V LINK function is switched on MODE 1 You can now control the video images using For more on switching video images refer to the owner s the Registration buttons manual for the connected device The V LINK function is switched on You can now control the video images using the twelve rightmost keys of the lower keyboard MODE 2 and Registration buttons No sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the right end of the keyboard suas 1 440 SNOEN 5 Touch lt Exit gt 215 Various Other Settings n m You con also use the following procedure to turn the MEMO V LINK function on 1 Hold down the Composer Reset button 216 and press either the Upper Organ Full button or the Upper Organ Jazz button Holding down the Composer Reset button and pressing the Upper Organ Full button switches the instrument to MODE 1 p 215 Holding down the Composer Re
101. MO You can also set the split point by pressing the key of CA Registration lam the lower keyboard that you want to be the Solo Split main Point Split Point P E TE A a The Sound Keyboard screen appears l Sound Keyboard d 130 Uoper Jii gai Theater Ens Orch Solo Jy Sound KBD BrassSect Trumpet seas Sail ower Organ Ml Orch aeh Bass gcc N 1 While touching the Solo Split Point value A1 C7 indication in the Split Point screen press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Solo Split Point 2 Touch lt Split Point gt The Solo Split Point will be set The Split Point screen appears split Point AANGAAN ANANAGA ARENAN J Sound KBD Rec Play z 148 Se Using the Lower Keyboard Efectiely Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Bass Split By using the Bass Split you can play the bass voice in the left hand side including C3 of the lower keyboard The location at which the lower MEMO keyboard is divided in this way to play the pedal bass voice is called the You can adjust the Bass Split Bass Split Point Point p 151 1 Select a Pedal Bass voice p 49 2 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Transpose Biggest Band nO _ i AS Music Assistant Orch Exit Controller Controller Effect SplitPoint
102. MUSIC ATELIER ROLAND ORGAN OWNER S MANUAL ROLAND ORGAN INACSIC ATELIER ATSOO OWNER S MANUAL Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 6 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2008 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION oo 2 NS go WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 5 H o DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR produc s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user t
103. Main screen Rana The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play ATELIER O1 The Erase Event screen appears Erase Event onan Gn D Vi n00 O oc SSS SN N y d N Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd Mii ALL ip 182 eA Editing Your Musical Performance Data 9 Touch the Event value the type of performance data that you wish to erase 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to specify the Event the type of performance data that you wish to erase Erase Event Setting ALL NOTE PANEL EXPRESSION VOICE TEMPO 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 8 Touch the Track value the track from which data will be erased 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to specify the Track the track from which data will be erased If you have selected EXPRESSION VOICE and TEMPO as the type of recording to be erased you need not specify the track Track ALL RHYTHM ACCOMP BASS LOWER UPPER SOLO CONTROL If you select ALL the recording will be erased from all parts 10 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 1 Touch the From value the measure at which erasure will begin 1 2 Touch lt gt lt gt to set From the measure at which erasure will begin 13 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 14 Touch the For value the number of m
104. Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W I TEL 868 638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro C A Av las industrias edf Guitar import 7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas Venezuela TEL 212 244 1122 AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Austrian Office Eduard Bodem Gasse 8 A 6020 Innsbruck AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM FRANCE HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 CROATIA ART CENTAR Degenova 3 HR 10000 Zagreb TEL 1 466 8493 CZECH REP CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR s r o Voctarova 247 16 CZ 180 00 PRAHA 8 CZECH REP TEL 2 830 20270 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE CYPRUS STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12
105. Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of Oct 1 2007 ROLAND For EU Countries 00 0 00 0000 pe This symbol indicates that in EU countries this product must be collected separately from household waste as defined in each region Products bearing this symbol must not be discarded together with household waste Dieses Symbol bedeutet dass dieses Produkt in EU Landern getrennt vom Hausm ll gesammelt werden muss gem den regionalen Bestimmungen Mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichnete Produkte diirfen nicht zusammen mit den Hausm ll entsorgt werden Ce symbole indique que dans les pays de l Union europ enne ce produit doit tre collect s par ment des ordures m nag res selon les directives en vigueur dans chacun de ces pays Les produits portant ce symbole ne doivent pas tre mis au rebut avec les ordures m nag res Questo simbolo indica che nei paesi della Comunita europea questo prodotto deve essere smaltito separatamente dai normali rifiuti domestici secondo la legislazione in vigore in ciascun paese I prodotti che riportano questo simbolo non devono essere smaltiti insieme ai rifiuti domestici Ai sensi dell art 13 del D Lgs 25 luglio 2005
106. Others button the Others Voice screen appears in the display screen but the Main screen will reappear if you wait several seconds without touching the screen If you want to change the voice for the Others button press the Others button once more then select the voice by quickly touching the screen while the Others Voice screen appears in the display Theater Or 4 m Theater Or 5 Theater Or 6 e 4 In the sub window touch lt Human Voice gt The indicator of the selected Others button will blink The Others Voice screen appears showing the sounds of the Human Voice group The Others Voice screen appears and the sounds of the Human Voice group appears Upper Organ 5 Touch lt g lt J to switch the screen and touch a voice name to select the desired voice Upper Organ Soprano 2 m Classical EX Gregorian 6 Once again press the Others button for the part whose sound you wish to set to confirm the voice The indicator of the Others button will change from blinking to lit Selecting and Playing Sounds MEMO For some human voices such as Jazz Scat the sound will change depending on the strength at which you play the keyboard If the Utility menu setting Initial Touch p 198 is OFF the sound will not change in response to the dynamics of your keyboard playing MEMO You can also
107. Play Options screen appears 4 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the Beat Rec Play Options a0 Metronome Vol J Sound KBD Metronome Sound Beat CD Audio Type 9 Touch the Beat setting The time signature setting screen appears Rec Play Options 6 Touch the time signature that you wish to set 7 Touch lt Exit gt MEMO If you re using Rhythm performance or Automatic lama Accompaniment the time signature will be specified automatically You cannot change the beat of previously recorded songs MOTT TAT EMA Various Other Settings Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back The ATELIER may be unable to correctly recognize the type of CD being used In such instances you can specify the type of CD manually 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears gt Utility The Utility screen appears Touch lt E Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears Touch lt gt lt B gt to display the CD Audio Type Rec Play Options Metronome Vol Metronome Sound Beat CD Audio Type Rec Play Options 1130 2 Metronome Val a J Sound KBD 4 Rec P Li 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description Auto The CD type is detected automatically General CDs for Player Piano contain audio Type A and MIDI data and the data format may vary from one CD to th
108. RAIN TEL 17 813 942 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 2285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha alia Hashnia St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN MUSIC HOUSE CO LTD FREDDY FOR MUSIC P O Box 922846 Amman 11192 JORDAN TEL 06 5692696 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL YOUSIFI amp SONS CO Al Yousifi Service Center P O Box 126 Safat 13002 KUWAIT TEL 00 965 802929 LEBANON Chahine S A L George Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L L C Malatan House No 1 Al Noor Street Ruwi SULTANATE OF OMAN TEL 2478 3443 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Behind Pizza Inn Prince Turkey Street aDawliah Building PO BOX 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 8643601 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Rawda Abdul Qader Jazairi St Bldg No 21 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY ZUHAL DIS TICARET A S Galip Dede Cad No 37 Beyoglu Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 249 85 10 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Ground Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Ltd Head
109. Removing the Music Rest Setting Up the Music Rest 1 To remove the music rest support it with one Attaching the Music Rest hand while loosening the screws 1 Insert the supplied screws for the music rest into the 2 Remove the music rest screw holes located on the top of the instrument After removing the music rest don t forget to retighten and lightly tighten them two locations the screws Connecting the Speaker Cable Screw 1 Plug the speaker cable extending from the stand into the Speaker connector located at the rear of the AT 500 s bottom panel Pay attention to the shape of the speaker cable s connector and insert it until you hear it click securely Sag Es LI IY TERRE J8 Sex Sa S N Ly Ea A WA L A A A 2a into place E S a 2 Put the music rest between the screws and the ATELIER s body A Organ side t Speaker box side Speaker Cord 3 While supporting the music rest with one hand secure it in place by turning the screws When attaching the music rest support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don t drop it Be careful so you don t get your fingers pinched NOTE Do not apply excessive force to the installed music rest Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music rest Before moving the organ be sure to remove the music rest NOTE to prevent accidents 20 Pao
110. Rhythm screen TU TUT EAL ULNA Playing Rhythm There are two ways to start the Rhythm You can press the Start Stop button to start the Rhythm or you can use Sync Start to have the Rhythm start when you play the lower keyboard or the pedal keyboard You can also make the Rhythm start with an intro or stop with an ending Pedal Arranger One Touch Sustain On Off Program Sync Start Variation Intro Count Down Start Stop Ending Starting at the Press of a Button Starting with an Added Intro I y Press the Intro Ending button Press the Start Stop button The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts While the Intro is playing the Intro Ending button indicator will light until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark Starting Without an Intro Press the Start Stop button The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played Making the Intro Short and Simple Press the Variation 1 button to make the indicator light up Press the Intro Ending button Press the Start Stop button A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts Using Rhythm Performance MEMO The functions of the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal p 121 M EMO You can change the operation of the Fill In Auto button or Fill In Break button p
111. Rhythms You Have Created scc cc0keda steuetonsieed swell darks adexechenr thal ace cahensaecabeies 196 Saving ne User RIYIN oroia en a uiccnce Maweaehaiuel used Selee R 196 Changing the Name of a User Rhythm Rename 0ccccccccesseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeennes 196 Saving User Rhythms to the User Memory or USB Memory 0ccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeenans 197 Contents Various Other Settings eeooeeessssoooeeeesssosooeeessssooooeeeessssooeeeeesssssoeeee 198 Adjusting How the Instrument Respond secu citnbedtaha i deareaed etic ostaatei ala Fi ciahies tines atic 198 Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity s ci9 cctuetess sie screeds th aliaee a tocseadctiadaasinddainadtasad 198 Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony tacstnearncniuscates tactace ac aieeutndenatatacduented maacsic 198 Perrornmeance FUNCHOMN SGMINGS 5 ticitoihs tate tama eanntalucaats Marte niweieliet te uRAeunteineect ates 199 Selecting the keyboard affected by the damper pedal ccccccccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 199 Changing the Function of the Expression Pedall cccccccccceeeeeeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 199 Choosing the keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will apply ccccee 200 Changing the Pitch Bend Range cidade ace atsionntiannesdnien staan atsatide tel usintdeniuatanenimedaceeins 201 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller ccccccccccccceeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeeeees 201 Rainn SEMIN GS lt sctusccc
112. Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 411 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama Jl Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd 45 1 Block C2 Jalan PJU 1 39 Dataran Prima 47301 Petaling Jaya Selangor MALAYSIA TEL 03 7805 3263 VIET NAM Suoi Nhac Company Ltd 370 Cach Mang Thang Tam St Dist 3 Ho Chi Minh City VIET NAM TEL 9316540 When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE LTD 150 Si
113. SIGS SOW sated Secrets tase EE EN 224 SMP Egma sieraed e ANE O RN 170 SMF Music Files 0c ceceeceeeeeceeeeseeseecs 156 252 SMF WID YCS eeii e Sasinaned Sau eenatie 252 S10 NEERA AE EAE AE nT SSR 50 Allemale ranson aAA tidehties sscannees 50 TOMO WSR einean E E 146 Solo Mod n T le setcaneiaeiees 147 Solo To Lower sicicdieceesgnlahord eidadgawaonedeadddeeienadd 146 SOO NVOCE anena A een daees 50 Sort RECISIGMOMN apinn o e Gn 112 Sound Generator cccceccecescesceseeceeceecs 251 252 Sound KBD MaN SGSN moriria nt Merete rence latent 30 PO eee eee ater cam ee eae teen eee a 251 Split Point Bass Split POM sristi Ear 151 SOlG plL POINT siena a eet dad Savas 148 SUB WINGOW aseritoisire enas aa tate Gree Eek 31 32 SUSI eienecesaedt Stew EOE G 25 Sustain Effect ccccsccecceccucceccesececceceesenseusens 133 Suslain ct 41s 11 eee ecient 135 VIC SIO ea nate ack arenas tor E ETA 76 System Main Sereen creniero e ate ESEE K R 30 T TEMDO eain OS 7 TOUGH SClEEN oraria T A 29 Tr Mute Track Mute ccecce 159 Track Dele a AE E E A 180 Track BUON ces occiseSncceed setts ites cri etA 154 ack MUIE hg sts hese teat ae ee tn E AERAR 157 Track Mute button cccceceececesceccuccceecenceecs 159 Transpose key GMS DOSE sersan oan 117 WG SCTEE My ehana aa a laveneeee 29 Playback Transpose cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeaee ees 206 ONS Stossel ERS 205 Tx MIDI Ch MIDI Transmit Channel
114. SLOW GLIDE Description Switch the Rotary speed between FAST and SLOW While the Foot Switch is pressed the pitch will temporarily be lowered and will gradually return to normal when you release the Foot Switch When the power is turned on Glide effect is added to the voice of all the sections being played on Upper keyboard LEADING BASS RHYTHM START STP COMP PLAY STOP INTRO ENDING VARIATION UP VARIATION DOWN The Leading Bass function p 82 will operate only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch Start Stop the Rhythm The same function as the Composer Play Stop button Each time you press the Foot Switch the performance data will play back or stop Play an Intro or Ending Switches the Variation button Each time you press the foot switch the Variation number will increment Switches the Variation button Each time you press the foot switch the Variation number will decrement VARIATION ALT FILL IN BREAK DAMPER OF UPPER DAMPER OF LOWER OFF Switches the Variation button If the Variation 1 button or 3 button is selected this will switch between the Variation 1 and 3 buttons If the Variation 2 button or 4 button is selected this will switch between the Variation 2 and 4 buttons Adds a fill in Stop the Rhythm at the end of that measure Notes played on the Upper keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pr
115. Solo To Lower Mode Solo Split Point Bass Split ON OFF Bass Split Point Sustain ON OFF Sustain Length Initial Touch Vintage Organ Setting Wall Type The Voices assigned for each part Level A V button Part Balance Volume The Reverb depth for each part The Chorus settings ON OFF of the voice The Octave shift settings for each part Drums SFX button ON OFF Drums SFX Set Manual Percussion button ON OFF Manual Percussion Set Chord Intelligence Chord Hold Leading Bass Lower Voice Hold ON OFF Tempo setting Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part Reverb depth of the Rhythm Accompaniment part Volume of the Rhythm drum part Reverb depth of the Rhythm drum part Volume of the Rhythm bass part Reverb depth of the Rhythm bass part More information about the track assignments when playing commercial SMF music files please refer to Correspondence Between Track Buttons and Track Mute Buttons When Playing Back Commercial SMF Music Files p 158 Sita ecordng eying Back Wha You Ply During recording the control track will store the operations as follows Displaying the Track Buttons e Recording panel operations Voice selections Tempo The track buttons will be displayed in the screen when you changes etc record or play back a performance Newly recorded performance data will be added without erasing the previously recorded data 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the
116. Touch lt gt lt M to select a folder Creating a Folder p 44 3 Touch the folder namve The Registrations in the folder will be displayed 4 Carry out steps 5 through 8 of Saving Registration Sets p 104 To exit the folder 1 Touch lt P gt lt B gt to select Up 2 Touch the Up indication 105 suong uolejsibey y Buis q a Using the Registration Buttons ETN Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER Here s how to recall a previously saved Registration set from the User memory or USB memory into the memory of the ATELIER Registrations can be selected in the following three ways Loading a Set of Registrations Load gt p 106 You can load a set a collection of settings for Registration buttons 1 8 from USB memory or user memory Loading an Individual Registration Load One gt p 107 Recall the settings of one of the Registration 1 8 buttons Recalling the Order that the Registrations are Saved on the USB Memory or User Memory Load Next gt p 122 Assign RIGHT Load Next to the foot switch and recall Registration sets in the order in which they are stored in USB memory or user memory Loading a Set of Registrations 106 If you want to load a Registration from USB memory connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector If you want to load a Registration from
117. a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk containing the Registration into the floppy disk drive Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen The Registration Load screen appears MA Registration Load l 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 TED or tecist o1 __o2REGisT 02_ Be aware that when you load Registrations from a USB memory or user memory the Registrations that were previously in internal memory will be lost It is a good idea to save important Registrations to USB memory or user memory p 103 MEMO You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the Registration button M EMO When you touch lt go to Save gt the instrument jumps to the Registration Save screen Loading an Individual Registration urna Using the Registration Butons Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to load from the Registration of USB memory select Ext Memory M EMO If you want to load from the Registration of floppy disk select Disk To select a Registration from a If you want to load from the Registration of user memory select User folder refer to Selecting a Registration from within a folder p 113 Touch lt 0 lt to select the Registration that you wish to load into internal memory To cancel operation touch lt Exit
118. a variety of activities releasing two albums on Columbia Records and performing organ regularly on the 11 PM TV program for four years She further contributes articles on a wide range of musical genres including classical and jazz is an accomplished arranger and has published numerous scores In 2002 King Records released Yuri s album Organ Chat all songs of which were performed and recorded using the Roland Organ Music ATELIER The album was acclaimed for its unique arrangements and sure playing prompting the release of Organ Chat 2 in 2005 Currently her musical activities range beyond Japan to include the United States Europe China and Southeast Asia and she has appeared on numerous CDs from King Records and other record companies as a recording arranger Short Cut List Quick Guide Function While the Quick Guide screen is displayed Short Cut Expression Pedal Bender Vibrato lever Upper Keyboard Lower Keyboard Pedalboard Left Foot Switch Right Foot Switch Damper Pedal Solo To Lower button Pedal Sustain button Rotary On Off button Rotary Slow Fast button Count Down button Upper Voice select buttons Solo Voice select buttons Alternate button Lower Voice select buttons Alternate button Pedal Voice select buttons Registration Write button One Touch Program button Harmony Intelligence buttons Song button gt Oo 5 Q O D o
119. ack and one for keyboard performance Normally data received at the MIDI In connector will control only the sound generator for GM2 GS data playback However by changing the MIDI IN Mode setting you can also control the keyboard sound generator from MIDI In 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears x System Master Tune Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode Tx MIDI Ch Upper 4 between MODE 1 and MODE 2 Each time you touch the MIDI IN Mode setting it will alternate between Mode 1 and Mode 2 Setting Description MODE 1 Control the instrument as a GS sound generator Channels 5 through 10 and Channels 12 14 15 are transmitted to the GS sound generator and all other channels are transmitted to the keyboard sound generator MODE 2 Channel MODE T MODE 2 Solo 2 Pedal GS 3 Lower 5 10 GS 11 Drums SFX 13 Manual Percussion 14 15 GS 16 Control Various Other Settings When the pedal part button is ON data received at the MIDI In connector will control the pedal part of keyboard sound generator When the pedal part button is OFF data received at the MIDI In connector will control the GS sound generator 4 Touch lt Exit gt ssc This setting remains stored in memory even while power is lama turned off Selecting the MIDI Transmit Channel When you use the MIDI connectors or the USB connector of the ATELIER to transmit musical data to externa
120. aesnseMadtacdovene caus pitas euntenantaatesleseasaaatats 69 Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part Lower Hold ccccccseeccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeessaeeeeeeas 70 Using Rhythm Performance cssssssccccsssssscccccsssssscccccsssssscccceessssscee Z l Seci io ab a 1 Renee pene ee eee en ene PES en fant eae eo Coen ee ee eee eee ere nee 7 Using Rhythms Stored in User Memory ccccccccccccceseeeeeceeaeeeeeeeesueeeeeeeeaneeeeeesaaeeeeees 72 Rayiho eare a cide hdada Canina EN S Moe a Nada nts 73 PIG INGE VAM vacdsted toes tnecacidac aaah ats tan beatae ie caden O A E 75 Starting at the Press of a Button s scaniaes a haclede eaaavinnccieeabactonieaammedawdteeeude 75 Starting the Rhythm Automatically When You Play the Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard Sync Start 76 Stopping ihe RAYN ee E Re EEE E A ee 77 Changing ARAYIN S Tempossa a cat deter e E 77 Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro osssssnseeessssinesssssrnnneesssrrrnresssrriresssrrrreeses 78 Playing Rhythm and Automatic ACCOMPONIMENL ccccceccccceseeececee eae eeeeeeeseeeeseeeaaeeeeeeaaaeees 78 Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 79 Changing the Arrangement of the Rhythm and Accompaniment Variation 66 79 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence ccccccecececceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaae sees 80 l gaing Bass FUNC Mcanctsory s
121. all the next Registration set p 122 Storing Registrations I y Make all the panel settings that you wish to store While holding down the Write button press one of the Registration buttons 1 8 The panel settings will be stored in the selected Registration button MEMO For details on the settings that are stored in a Registration refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons p 253 97 suong uolejsibey y BusN Using the Registration Buttons Recalling a Registration Settings that have been registered to Registration buttons 1 8 can be pee recalled in two ways INSTANT and DELAYED NEMPO When changing the way At the factory this is set to DELAYED Registrations are called Up refer to Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations p How to Recall a Registration DELAYED 99 Recalling Voices and Other Panel Settings 1 Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons 1 8 Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accompaniment in Addition to the Panel Settings 1 Press and hold a Registration button 1 8 for several seconds The indicator of the Rhythm select button will blink and the panel settings and settings related to Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled How to Recall a Registration INSTANT Recalling Settings for Rhythm Performance and Automatic Accomp
122. also lets you The Song Select screen appears SMF Music Files SMF Standard MIDI File is a data format that was created in order to standardize music data formats between manufacturers Collections of songs in SMF music files are commercially available in a wide range of styles for enjoyment as accompaniment for practicing musical instruments and for karaoke If you want to purchase SMF music files you can contact the dealer where you purchased the ATELIER To Play Back Only One Song 1 Prepare the song that you want to play back If you want to play a song from USB memory connect it to the External Memory connector If you want to play a song from floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert a floppy disk into the drive When the performance song loaded from a USB memory is a Standard MIDI File B will be displayed on the Main screen Transpose S Rhythm IQ System 9 Quick Guide 156 Song Select e ore 02 April in Par Ss 03 Beyond the S 04 Cabaret 05 Caravan E D urra Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to play a song from USB memory choose Ext Memory If you want to play a song from floppy disk choose Disk In the screen touch lt M gt lt B gt to select the song that you wish to play back Touch lt lt song Touch lt A EZD BB t
123. ame or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the External Drive connector and insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive 2 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen MEMO The Registration Load screen appears You can also open the Registration Load screen by f z pressing the Registration MA Registration Load button on the panel LI 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 3 Touch lt File gt The Registration File Edit screen appears 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 Down 04 REGIST 04 OS REGIol 0S 112 sia 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose Ext Memory if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory or Disk if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on a floppy disk Choose User if you want to rename or sort Registrations saved in user memory 9 Touch lt 0 lt M in the screen to select a Registration Changing the Order of Registration Touch lt Up gt or lt Down gt to move the Registration Change the order The selected Registration will be moved Up s upward earlier in the order Change the order The selected Registration will be moved Down downward later in the order Changing the Name of the Registration 7 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears Rename the Registration as described in Assigning a Name
124. an Jazz button indicator lights The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds Upper Organ Voice Jazz Organ2 Now when you play the Upper keyboard the Jazz Organ2 will sound 2 Press the Upper Organ Alternate button the indicator lights When you play the Upper keyboard the ComboJazzOrg will sound Each time you press the Alternate button you will switch between the two voices which are assigned the button 3 Press the Upper Orchestral Piano button the indicator lights When you play the Upper keyboard Grand Piano will be added producing a mixture of two different voices 48 HH BERBER ome u Selecting Pedal Bass Voice Press the buttons of the various parts of Pedal to select voices Immediately after the power is turned on the Pedal Bass voice will sound single notes using the Organ Bass1 voice Example Select Str Bass Pdl for the Pedal part Alternate To Lower Z E Pedal 1 Press the Pedal String button indicator lights The name of the selected voice appears in the display for several seconds Pedal Orchestral Voice Str Bass Pdl Now when you play the Pedalboard Str Bass Pdl String Bass Pedal will be heard Selecting and Playing Sounds MEMO Normally playing the pedalboard will sound one note at a time Settings can be adjusted to allow multiple
125. an place the panel overlay sheet included with the ATELIER on the panel so that the button functions will be easy to see 1 Place the panel overlay sheet on Fill In buttons as shown in the illustration below To To Variation Original Fill In On the panel overlay sheet are printed the names of the buttons for when Rhythm Mode is set to S SERIES Button Description Fill In A fill in p 79 will be played and To Variation then an elaborate Rhythm pattern will button play Fill In To Original A fill in p 79 will be played and button then a basic Rhythm pattern will play 204 Starting the Rhythm if Rhythm Mode is S SERIES Starting with an Added Intro 1 Press the Intro Ending button The Intro is played and the Rhythm starts While the Intro is playing the Intro Ending button indicator will light until the Intro ends then the button indicator will go dark Starting with a short intro 1 Press the Fill In To Variation or Fill In To Original button Start Stop button indicator will blink The indicator for the Fill In To Variation or To Original button will blink 2 Press the Start Stop button A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts Starting Without an Intro 1 Press the Start Stop button The Rhythm starts without an Intro being played Stopping the Rhythm if Rhythm Mode is S SERIES Stopping with an Ending 1 Press the Intro Ending button
126. an specify chords with a combination of the lower keyboard and pedalboard 3 Se Touch lt Options gt The Rhythm Options screen appears Rhythm Options Chord Intelligence a Count Down Sound VOICE i j Touch the Leading Bass setting to turn it ON Each time you touch the Leading Bass setting it will be switched ON OFF To turn off the Leading Bass function set the Leading Bass setting to OFF Using Rhythm Performance MEMO You can assign the Leading Bass functions to either of the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal Please refer to Changing the Function of the Foot Switch p 121 83 SOUBUUOLOg WUIAYY Buisn aa Using Rhythm Performance svn A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings One Touch Program 84 The ATELIER provides a very convenient One Touch Program button By simply pressing this button once the Arranger function will be turned ON and keyboard voices that are most appropriate for playing with the currently selected Rhythm Automatic Accompaniment are selected By pressing the One Touch Program button you can make the following settings e Panel settings e g sounds and volume suitable for the Rhythm e Arranger On Off button lit Automatic Accompaniment playing e Sync Start button and Intro Ending button lit Waiting for Sync Start p 76 e Chord Intellig
127. and rename the selected Rhythm p 92 The selected Rhythm will be moved earlier in the order The selected Rhythm will be moved later in the order The selected Rhythm will be deleted p 94 You can copy Rhythms from USB memory to user memory or copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory p 87 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose User if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in user memory or choose Ext Memory if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in USB memory Choose Disk if you want to change the order of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk Touch lt 0 lt to select the Rhythm Touch lt Up gt or lt Down gt to move the Rhythm Touch lt Exit gt Using Rhythm Performance 91 vuewlou d WyMyy Buisn aa Using Rhythm Performance EL Renaming a Saved Rhythm 3 92 You can rename Rhythms stored in User memory p 72 or USB memory Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears Touch lt gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears Touch lt File Edit gt The Rhythm File Edit screen appears Rhythm File Edit 02 6 8 Ballad 03 Trad Tango Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose User if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in user memory or choose Ext Memory i
128. and touch the desired keyword The voice will be assigned to the selected keyboard If you want to continue changing the voice settings repeat steps 2 5 ANN EENAA NANNAN urna Convenient Function Music Assistant Function A collection of the world s best most well known songs were carefully selected then the optimum panel settings for each of them were determined and the resulting data was stored inside the instrument Simply select the keyword that most closely suggests the character of the song you have in mind and a Rhythm performance a sound for the melody and other selections will be made for you Once you ve selected a keyword all you have to do is play the keyboard to start performing l Touch lt Music Assistant gt on the Main screen MEMO If another screen is open touch Transpose C E lt Main gt to access the main screen suonouny JUBIUBAUOD M 37 Convenient Functions 2 Touch lt B lt to switch screens and touch a 38 keyword appropriate for the character of the song i Music Assistant i MEMP You can also switch screens by using the Value dial gj J The Registration 1 4 buttons flash Panel settings appropriate for the keyword will automatically be called up for the Registration 1 4 buttons On the Lower keyboard play a chord At th
129. animent in Addition to Panel Settings 1 Press and immediately release one of the Registration buttons 1 8 98 SMT f Using the Registration Buttons UA AMAA Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations Settings for Rhythm play and Automatic Accompaniment are recalled when you continue holding a Registration button 1 8 for several seconds but you can change this so that the settings are recalled the instant you press the button 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen The Registration Load screen appears MA Registration Load 130 Li 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 ES v jE f Fe 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears l0 MA Registration Load We ul 03 REGIST 03 3 Touch lt Options gt The Registration Options screen appears MA Registration Options fee Arranger Update INSTANT SS Trans Update INSTANT MEMO You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the Registration button on the panel MEMO You can also use the following method to open the Registration Options screen 1 Touch lt Quick Guide gt on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen 2 Press the Registration Write button The Registration Options screen appears 99 suong uonejsibey y Buisph n Using the Registration Buttons 4 Touch the Arranger Update setting to
130. ard o omom en ANA AIA This setting is not stored in the Registration MEMO You can modify the setting so that decay is only applied to notes played on the Upper keyboard p 200 Decay cannot be added to the Solo voices Decay can be applied to Pedal Bass voices played on the Lower keyboard when the Pedal To Lower button indicators are lit or set Bass Split to ON In this case a decay will not be applied to the pedal bass voice eee HH BERBER ome eine Using the Pitch Bend Vibrato Lever When you move the Pitch Bend Vibrato lever to the left or right you can obtain a smooth change in the pitch of the notes being played Pitch Bend effect Move the lever to the right to raise the pitch and to the left to lower it Also when you push the lever away from you a vibrato effect can be obtained Vibrato Effect Pitch Bend Effect By default immediately after the power is turned on the Pitch Bend effect is added to the voices of all the sections being played on the Upper keyboard Using the Performance Functions MEMO You can also adjust the range of the pitch which is shifted by the Pitch Bend lever For details refer to Changing the Pitch Bend Range p 201 MEMO Please note that only the appropriate voices will allow vibrato to be added refer to Voice list Appendix separate bo
131. assigned Turn the Drums SFX off or play keys to which drums sounds are assigned p 66 The Lower keyboard will not produce sound while an Intro or Ending is being This is not a malfunction played Percussion Set 3 has been selected for the Upper keyboard When Percussion Set 3 is selected some keys may have no sound assigned to them For the upper keyboard select a voice other than Percussion Set 3 p 48 p 228 The power of the connected external Use the correct procedure to turn on the devices is not turned on power of the connected external devices p 231 The V LINK function is set Mode 2 When V LINK setting is Mode 2 the group of twelve keys starting at the very right of the lower keyboard are used for controlling video images Therefore no sounds are played even when you press these keys Turn the V LINK function off or select Mode 1 for the V LINK function p 215 Problems with the Sound len ek Seton e If there is a cell phone nearby you may hear noise from the ATELIER when an incoming call or outgoing call occurs or during a conversation Noise is heard in the sound When the human voice Jazz Scat is selected playing dynamics do Initial Touch is set to OFF not change the sound When you release your fingers from keys in the Lower keyboard The Lower Voice Hold is at ON the notes continue sounding You have selected a Marimba T
132. at have been tested and found to be m compatible is available on the Roland website http www roland com About the Display The ATELIER makes use of a Touch Screen This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen igh tI The explanations in this manual a include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown 7 A by the display Note however Understanding the Main and Related Screens that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually eeoeoeoeeeeeveoeeeeoeoeeeeoeeeeoeeaeeoeeoeeee ee 0G 8 8 8 OO eee see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Ae dsiq ay jnoqy The Touch Screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger Pressing hard or using a hard object can damage the E D A SSS Touch Screen Be careful not to Music press too hard and be sure to Assistant use only your fingers to operate the Touch Screen 9 10 11 The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced due to changes in the Number Description surrounding environment and Bouncing Ball over time If this happens A ball will bounce in time with the Rhythm or song follow the steps in Repositioning the Touch 2 Beat Screen p 217 to correct the Transpose pointer position Displays the keyboard transposition setting Chord Name 4 Displays the name of the chor
133. ate the name of the next Registration set Using the Performance Functions Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal You can use the expression pedal to adjust the overall volume When you depress the Expression Pedal the volume increases The volume decreases as you tilt the pedal back Decrease the volume Increase Vv the volume Using the expression pedal enables you to give your performances even richer musical expressiveness The expression pedal features the following special characteristics e Completely releasing the expression pedal does not lower the volume to zero If you do want to turn down the volume completely set the Master Volume slider to the Min Minimum position Even as you release your foot from the expression pedal and lower the volume the lower range portion will linger on This provides a natural sounding resonance When an Active Expression voice is selected the expression pedal can be used to produce changes in the voice p 59 M EMO You can specify how the Expression Pedal will affect the sound when it is pressed p 124 MEMO You can also specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the recording of your performance p 199 MEMO You can specify whether the Expression Pedal will or will not control the volume during the playback of recorded performance p 200 123 suonouny BOURWJOLEd
134. ation When connecting or disconnecting cables grasp the plug not the cable to prevent short circuits or broken connections This device may produce a certain amount of heat but this is not a malfunction Please enjoy your music in ways that do not inconvenience other people nearby and pay particular attention to the volume at nighttime Using headphones will allow you to enjoy music without having to be concerned about others When transporting or shipping this device package it in an appropriate amount of cushioning material Scratches damage or malfunctions may occur if you transport it without appropriate packaging If using the music rest do not apply excessive force to it Some connection cables contain a resistor Do not connect such cables to this device Doing so may make the volume extremely low or inaudible Please use connection cables not containing a resistor Before opening or closing the keyboard lid always make sure that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument in particular they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid Otherwise due to the structural design of this instrument small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it If such a situation is encountered you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased or contact the nearest
135. bcdefghijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz Symbols I amp 2 5_0123456789 Del Delete a character Space Insert a space Move the cursor the symbol that indicates the location at which a characters will be input to left or right To cancel the operation touch lt Cancel gt When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt The Registration set in the ATELIER s internal memory has now been named BMA Registration Save 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 urna Using the Registration Butons Saving Registration Sets 3 With the settings of Registration buttons 1 8 considered as one set you can store the Registration set to USB memory or User memory We recommend that complex panel settings or Registrations you wish to keep be saved on USB memory Furthermore when you save Registrations created on the ATELIER to USB memory you can call up their settings on other ATELIER Series instruments and use the Registrations the same way Connect your USB memory to the external memory connector If you want to save Registration data to a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector Into the floppy disk drive insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen MEMO The Registration Load screen appears You can also open the Registration Load screen by E pressing the Registration MA Registra
136. begins When copying ends the in the screen will change to the Registration name that you copied MEMO If you choose lt Copy All gt all Registrations stored in the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied ina single operation Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the Registration data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER If you do so the Registration data will not be loaded into the ATELIER and malfunctions could result After returning the Registration stored in the user memory to the factory settings p 218 re load the Registration from USB memory 115 suong uolejsibey y BulsN Using the Registration Buttons iran If you select a number in which a Registration is already saved a screen like the following will appear MEMO You can return only the user memory to the factory settings A Overwrite Registration 0K Refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings p 218 If you want to delete the previously saved Registration and overwrite it with the Registration you re newly saving touch lt OK gt If you don t want to delete the previously saved Registration touch lt Cancel gt then select a number at which no Registration has been saved and copy the Registration to that number Copying Registration from User Memory to USB Memory 116 Y
137. ber Refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings p 218 vuewIou d Wyyy Buisn Copying Rhythms from User Memory to USB Memory You can copy Rhythms from user memory to USB memory In this case touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Rhythm File Copy screen in step 5 of the above procedure so the arrow points upwards In this state you ll be copying Rhythms from user memory to USB memory Rhythm File Copy IR Rec Play SF ies SS SSS a 03 Trad Tango D u ks The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Rhythms from USB memory to user memory 89 tn Pc all Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms You can rearrange the order of the Rhythms stored in User memory p 72 or USB memory 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears Rhythm i EE 2 Touch lt Ep gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears 90 3 ANNOTATE UMMM KAMAE Touch lt File Edit gt The Rhythm File Edit screen appears Rhythm File Edit 02 6 8 Ballad 03 Trad Tango 04 MarchingBand O05 Button Rename Up Down Delete Copy uM Meaning Modify the name Change the order upward Change the order downward Delete the Rhythm Copies the Rhythm Description The Rename screen appears You can touch the screen
138. ccceeeeeeceeeesseeeeesesseeeeeesaneees 175 Starting recording at the right moment Count In Recording ccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaene sees 176 Copying PSN Oman li OMNI asset ereces tara theta N dials Cena e a AS 177 Editing Your Musical Performance Data ccccccssssccsscssssssccrccessssee 179 Deleting a Specific Measure Delete Measure cccccccccce ee eeeecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaneeeeeeeeeeaaes 179 Delete the Recording from a Track Delete Track ccccceeecceccccccce esse eeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeeanens 180 Erase Recoraing Erase Event osre ada etme tasted o 182 Copying Measures CODY pimini 1525 n n A N E N 184 Correct Timing Inaccuraci s Quantize arcieri aa E E EEEE ee aes 185 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms cssssscccccessssscrreees 187 14 Preparations for Creating User Rhythms ccccccseeecccceeee sees eeeeeceeesseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaens 188 Displaying the Rhythm Customize Scre n cccccccceseeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeessaeeeeees 188 SEIEC HIG Me DN Oiane Sacto oas Musee E ieee recone Rae eines ee ee 189 kading he RIIN Miec rece danss aes tent ghaienaott cesta O 190 Making tne Division oening cresien a T a ide 191 Creating he User RIV tN aoninoinea ire E ela ee A 192 Eainig ne IV tr Wi se a a es ee Cet ees varia tad da 192 Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used cccccccsseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenans 195 Deleting
139. ccomn u 4 Sound KBD Effect Rotary Speed Rev De Sa ae Rec Play ev ol ES a a Rev De is CA Registration Rotary Color Reverb Type Wall Type 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to adjust the setting Setting 3 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the Rev Depth 0 10 AUTO Accomp Rhythm A Bass only Reverb Depth For the three Parts of the Accomp Rhythm and Accompaniment Bass you have the option of selecting the AUTO setting Parts for which AUTO is selected will be set to the Reverb Depth that is most suitable for the Rhythm currently selected 6 Touch lt Exit gt 140 u ra Applying Various Effects to the Sound Using the D Beam Controller for Additional Enjoyment Modifying the Sound You can modify the sound simply by moving your hand above the D Beam controller located on the panel NF D Beam Pitch Filter Volume FJ 5 1 Press either the Pitch Filter or Volume button for the D Beam so the button is lit in red Button Button status Description Changes the pitch of the sounds you play on wc the upper keyboard Changes the tonal character of the sounds you play on the upper keyboard For some sounds the tonal change may be difficult to notice Filter Changes the volume of the sounds you play voume on the upper keyboard 2 Move your hand above the D Beam controller The effect assigned to the D Beam controller
140. cecceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeeeeaaes 209 Adjusting the timing of a player piano CD s piano sound and accompaniment 210 Oiher SINS eneo eect etic eth ee aed aaa E A ened ia amNacad 210 Adjust the Standard Pitch Master Une s o ustecet Ma sdts atte dalendSiusidabnn ate tie ential itiesidy 210 Adjusting ineeMiC E NO recense Brack decades tlnecd bea vesderiGaccs ee Macee ie tea ncice ees 211 Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers cccccseecccccceee sees eeceeseessseeeeeeeeeeuseeeeeeeeees 211 seting me PC RUMDe escoa lee eee a a cies ce erage meena awe ae 212 MIDEN INCI tetas ie Seating sce eal tata ha E a cae ee ee ae 212 Selecting the MIDI TreinsmitCOnGnmellcssdus Sua lvecstiietadvanraeacedinbiondoeasad enue ai epc diated 213 Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen cccccccccccceeeeeeeceeeseesseeeeeeeeees 214 Switching the Background of the Main Screen cccccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeenaes 214 Wing the V LINKtinGhon areor a ies E aerate T 215 Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER s Screen on a Display cccceeeccccceeeeeeeeeees 216 Repositioning the Touch SCECIsiecesbecat etd alecbate toh taseeanacetetece cus lbeesteecnetaeaeasdeant 217 Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory SettingS ccccsccccceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeneees 218 Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings 219 Formatting a USB Memory FO
141. chestral part Lower Orchestral part Pedal part and Solo part For more on the active expression voices refer to Performing with an Active Expression Voice p 59 Tr MEMO You can also confirm the voice by touching lt Exit gt in the Others Voice Other Voice select screen You can also press the key for the part containing a changed voice to confirm the voice setting MEMO For more information about the voices that can be assigned to an Others button please refer to Voice List Appendix separate booklet Selecting and Playing Sounds Creating Organ Sounds Vintage Organ The Vintage Organ button lets you add the vintage organ sounds to the upper lower and pedal parts In addition you can also use the harmonic bars to modify the selected sound as desired The ATELIER provides nine harmonic bars for the upper part and lower part Pa respectively and two harmonic bars for the pedal part MEMP i You can use the Solo part s Each harmonic bar is assigned a sound of a different footage pitch and by harmonic bars to adjust the layering these sounds you can create a variety of organ tones volume of the Solo part voice NWOBRODNO NORO0DNO nmNoOBROOD NO nNoOROO NO esas Vintage Organ On Off e bhiod M B f i aes CALI HIAAALIIAAGALLIIGIVAALI Harmonic Bar By sliding the harmonic bars forward or backward
142. chord will sound 3 For example if you press the root C of the C major chord in the lower MEMO F keyboard the notes of the C major chord C E and G will be sounded When you touch the One S D by the voice selected for the lower part y P Chord Intelligence setting will automatically be turned ON 9 If you wish to turn off the Chord Intelligence function switch it OFF 81 Using Rhythm Performance iran Leading Bass Function 2 82 When Automatic Accompaniment is used and the Pedal To Lower button is ON the Pedal Bass voice will normally play the root note p 251 of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard If the Leading Bass function is enabled the lowest note of the chord you play on the Lower keyboard will then be used as the bass note the bottom note of the chord This allows the bass to be a note other than the root of the chord you play and the bass note will change when inverted chords are played p 251 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears Rhythm Se as LooseBigBand Scat Swing Big Serenade Club Swing Fast BigBand Vocal Swing Touch lt f gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears a MEMO You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing the Rhythm buttons MEMO When the Leading Bass function is on and the Chord Intelligence function p 80 is off you c
143. cify the interval at which images will change when you play back a slide show p 236 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt Utility gt 3 Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt The VIMA TUNES screen appears VIMA TUNES In the Mood d 130 Video M SlideShow J Sound KBD Playback Transpose Melody oo 4 Rec PI Mute Guide celts dam i In Registration 4 Touch lt Options gt The Video Option screen appears Video Options EZ 7 Slide Show Type MIX Slide Show Interval 8 SECONDS ig sBules 194 0 SNOEN a 225 Various Other Settings 9 Touch the Slide Show Interval setting Video Options Slide SF Slide St 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 5 SECONDS 8 SECONDS 12 SECONDS 4 MEASURES 6 MEASURES 8 MEASURES 7 Touch lt Exit gt 226 MTT EAGUM UAINA Connecting with External Device Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors L Mono RGB Out Input N Phones vse Mic MID 00 9 8 2 a e Max 4 5 6 7 8 The functions of the jacks on the bottom of the keyboard are described below 1 Output Main L Mono R Jacks 6 Mic Jack gt p 23 These jacks can be connected to your audio system to Connect microphone here enjoy more powerful sound 7 MIDI Out In Connectors gt p 231 2 Input L Mono R Jacks You can connect external MIDI dev
144. connect the power cord to an AC outlet of the correct voltage as marked on the device About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the abolo left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet Use only the included power cord You must use only the power cord included with the device Do not use the included power cord with any other device Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on it Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Do not bend the power cord excessively or place heavy objects on the power cord Doing so will damage the power cord and may cause short circuits or faulty connections possibly resulting in fire or electrical shock Do not connect excessive numbers of electrical devic
145. connector and insert it without using excessive force The external memory connector may be damaged if you use excessive force when inserting USB memory Do not insert anything other than USB memory e g wire coins other types of device into the external memory connector Doing so will damage the external memory connector Do not apply excessive force to the connected USB memory If you will not be using USB memory for an extended period of time close the USB memory cover Security Slot K P 26 htto www kensington com Handling the CDs CD ROMs e When handling the discs please observe the following e Do not touch the encoded surface of the disc e Do not use in dusty areas e Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed vehicle Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Keep the disc in the case Do not keep the disc in the CD drive for a long time Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside Do not wipe along circumference Do not use benzine record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind Do not bend the disc Bending discs may prevent proper reading and writing of data and may further result in malfunction Copyright e This product can be used to recor
146. ct wonderful Registrations created by top ranking organists such as Hector Olivera The Music Assistant function makes it easy to recall appropriate Rhythm and sound settings simply by selecting a desired atmosphere for your song Highly realistic Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment functions All Rhythms use data from performances by professional drummers featuring high quality patterns with all the grooves and subtle nuance of the real thing In addition you can use Automatic Accompaniments that are perfectly matched to each Rhythm to enjoy the feeling of playing with your own band in the background Human voices and phrases In addition to a full array of organ sounds the ATELIER series provides human voices such as Jazz Scat and human voice phrases such as Amen Active Expression sounds For some of the sounds moving the expression pedal will vary not only the volume but also the tone or add other sounds From pianissimo to fortissimo the tonal character of the sound itself will change as you perform a crescendo or strings may appear behind the piano creating dynamic changes in tonality Harmony Intelligence The Harmony Intelligence function automatically adds harmony to the upper keyboard sound according to the chord you play in the lower keyboard This gives you greater tonal depth and a more powerful performance 64 note lower keyboard for plenty of range The 64 note range can be split into zones allowing a solo v
147. ctice 7 Touch lt gt gt to stop playing back the song 235 aa oepi pue oIsnyy BulAoluy Enjoying Music and Video u Displaying a Slide Show while the Song Plays 236 While playing back a VIMA CD ROM VIMA TUNES you can view a slide show of images that match the mood of the song Songs on a CD ROM created for VIMA VIMA TUNES contain slide show images suitable for those songs making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show without having to prepare your own images photos Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the VIMA TUNES disc into the CD drive Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears Touch lt Utility gt Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt MEMD You can also press the panel s The VIMA TUNES screen appears Song button and choose a VIMA TUNES song from Song J 130 amp Select screen S VIMA TUNES In the Mood S a 1 Video aM SlideShow J Sound kBD Playback Transpose Melody seJ case All Recommended In SMF Touch lt Slide Show gt so it s lit MAMA Enjoying Music and Video ai Touch lt 44 gt lt gt to select the song you want to play NOTE It will take a certain amount of time until VIMA TUNES song can be selected Touch lt gt gt to start playing back the song A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on the ext
148. d or duplicate audio or visual material without being limited by certain technological copy protection measures This is due to the fact that this product is intended to be used for the purpose of producing original music or video material and is therefore designed so that material that does not infringe copyrights belonging to others for example your own original works can be recorded or duplicated freely Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit Main Features We want to take a moment to thank you for your purchase of the Roland Organ Music ATELIER The ATELIER is an electronic organ which provides a generous collection of rich organ sounds In addition it is designed to be easy to learn and use In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety The AT 500 is abbreviated in this manual as ATELIER respectively Basic Concepts of the ATELIER Series A full complement of organ sounds A wide range of basic organ sounds ranging from jazz organ and pipe organ to theatre organ are onboard so you are sure to enjoy having access to all the sounds you expect from an organ Panel layout based on a tradition of emphasis on realtime operation
149. d that is played in the lower keyboard l Do not place items on the touch Indication button screen Pressed to choose which name to have indicated either the Rhythm Name Song Name or Registration Name j The name of the Rhythm will appear in the screen when you turn on the power You can change this indication to the song name or the Registration PN name MEMO You can make settings so that 6 Rhythm Name Song Name Registration Name ihe bounding di eneon 7 Quick Registration in the main screen p 214 Press this when you want to use the Quick Registration function p 35 and change the background of 8 Music Assistant the main screen p 214 Press this when you want to use the Music Assistant function p 37 29 About the Display EA Number Description Rhythm 9 You can play Rhythms from this instrument or play or store Rhythms from USB memory or user memory Rhythm related settings can also be made here 10 System Make various settings Quick Guide 11 Displays the Quick Guide screen While the Quick Guide screen is displayed you can press the keyboard a button or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen p 41 12 Tempo MEMO 13 Measure Tempo measure number _ or T T T ee SS ee Sound KBD gt lt Rec Play gt Sound KBD Sound Keyboard Sonn e Gan Hi 14 lt Registration gt and lt Main gt Select a voice tone or make settings fo
150. dal p 121 MEMO If Auto Std Tempo p 203 is on and you switch the Rhythm while the Rhythm is stopped the tempo will automatically be set appropriately for that Rhythm If you switch Rhythms when Auto Std Tempo is off the tempo remains unchanged even when you switch the Rhythm M EMO You can confirm the tempo and beat with the bouncing ball in the Main screen p 29 M EMO You can also use the Value dial to change the tempo 77 ovuewIou d WyMyy Buisn a Using Rhythm Performance Playing the Count Sound at the End of the Intro If an intro is played before your performance you can have a countdown played to the end of the intro allowing you to understand easily where you Start Stop are to start playing LCL Count Down Ending 1 Press the Count Down button getting the indicator to light 2 Press the Intro Ending button 3 Press the Start Stop button NEM The intro plays and a countdown plays to the end of the intro You can change the countdown When the Sync Start button is lit specifying the chord on the Lower keyboard sound p 202 starts the intro and a countdown is given 4 To stop the countdown press the Count Down button turning off the indicator light Playing Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment The Arranger function of the ATELIER can add an Automatic Accompaniment to each Rhythm Based on the
151. data from the USB memory connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector If you want to delete Registration data from the floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector Into the floppy disk drive insert a floppy disk Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen The Registration Load screen appears Touch lt File gt The Registration File Edit screen appears 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 O5 REGIST 05 Description The Rename screen appears You can Rename Modify the name touch the screen and rename the selected Registration p 101 Change the order The selected Registration will be moved upward earlier in the order p 112 Down Change the order The selected Registration will be moved downward later in the order p 112 Delete Delete the Registration The selected Registration will be deleted Create Create new folder A new folder will be created You can copy Registration from USB Copies the memory to user memory or copy Registration Registration from user memory to USB memory p 114 Up Copy MEMO You can also open the Registration Load screen by pressing the Registration button on the panel a MMC NTT IAAL Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to delete from the Registration to USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to delete from t
152. devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections In general a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument However before you connect any monitor make sure it meets the following specifications 1 Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the Resolution 800 x 480 pixel i cera display to be connected p 22 Horizontal scan frequency 31 5 kHz Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz 2 Connect your display to the ATELIER Connector 3 row 15 pin D Sub type Use display cable sold separately to connect the Signal Analog display to the RGB Out connector on the ATELIER Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the 3 Switch the ATELIER 22 e Switch on the p 22 frequencies mentioned above Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move and in certain 4 Switch on the connected display cases may even damage the display For more on handling the external display refer to your MEMO display s owner s manual 232 Enjoying Music and Video You can connect an external display to the ATELIER and use it to view images from a device connected to the ATELIER You can also connect a CD drive commercially available and play back VIMA TUNES sold separately While playing a VIMA TUNES song you ca
153. down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB USB cables are not included Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase Turn on the power to the ATELIER before starting up MIDI applications on the computer Do not turn the ATELIER on or off while any MIDI application is running 230 Making the Settings for the USB Driver 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the USB Driver x System USB Driver V LINK Screen Out 3 Touch the USB Driver setting to switch between GENERIC and ORIGINAL Each time you touch the USB Driver setting it will alternate between GENERIC and ORIGINAL Setting Description Choose this if you want to use the standard USB driver that was included GENERIC with your computer Normally you should use this mode Choose this if you want to use a USB ORIGINAL driver downloaded from the Roland website 4 Turn the ATELIER s volume to the minimum level switch off the power then turn it back on again r this setting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMO 9 P lama turned off Connecting with External Device Connecting MIDI Devices By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data you can control the performances on one device from the
154. e File Edit screen Save screen or Load screen for Rhythms songs or Registrations is open BA Registration Load l 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 Convenient Functions Listening to the Demo Songs The ATELIER provides demo songs Here s how to play the Demo songs and fully appreciate the sounds Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment that are available with the ATELIER Composer Song Registraticfi S A sia For details on the composer of each demo song and their profiles refer to Demo Song R Play eset Play Stop Rec List p 255 JL E la gt E SUON OUN JUSIUBAUOD 1 Press the Demo button to make the indicator light The Demo Screen appears Jazz Organ With its harmonic bars the Music Atelier is uniquely capable of the type of organ jazz performance heard in this song The combination of harmonic bars is changed in realtime over the course of the performance allowing you to experience the true enjoyment of the jazz organ 2 Touch lt a4 gt or lt 1 gt on screen to select the demo song Jazz Organ With its harmonic bars the Music Atelier is uniquely capable of the type of organ jazz performance heard in this song The combination of harmonic bars is changed in realtime over the course of the performance allowing you to experience the true enjoyment of the jazz on M EMO You can play stop the dem
155. e Lower keyboard or the Pedalboard A short Intro is played and the Rhythm starts 76 Stopping the Rhythm Stopping with an Ending Press the Intro Ending button An Ending is played then the Rhythm stops While the Ending is playing the Intro Ending button indicator will light until the Ending finishes the button indicator will be turned off Stopping without an Ending Press the Start Stop button The Rhythm stops without an Ending being played Making the Ending Short and Simple I 2 Press the Variation 1 button Press the Intro Ending button A short Ending is played then the Rhythm stops Changing a Rhythm s Tempo You can change the tempo of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment p 78 C Standard a es Tempo Press the Tempo lt 4 and gt buttons to change the tempo speed of the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment Tempo lt d button The tempo becomes slower Tempo p gt button The tempo becomes faster By pressing the Tempo lt and P gt buttons simultaneously the tempo is returned to the standard preset tempo for the selected Rhythm The value of the tempo currently set 20 500 beats per minute can be checked in the screen Using Rhythm Performance MEMO The functions of the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pe
156. e Proyecto Central No 3 Ens La Esperilla Santo Domingo Dominican Republic TEL 809 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil Ecuador TEL 593 4 2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34 01 zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL 502 599 2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S A de C V BO Paz Barahona 3 Ave 11 Calle S O San Pedro Sula Honduras TEL 504 553 2029 MARTINIQUE Musique amp Son Z I Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F W I TEL 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago 503 Managua Nicaragua TEL 505 277 2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima Peru TEL 511 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor
157. e USB Memory u icici2icectceandte nacido te dbate Ibe cnlecsaussadibel desdlannciesiaaelne 26 Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive sisisc i2he 2s dide5eddudbiandasdndlacnndd sbid vost easels Giedelanabeaksthien 27 BST aro i GB preter eee eee ti emer ne ere en ttn Ra S S A ET A ee eRe a eee ees eet 27 Connecin g eD DIVE serae r E E OET T AN ENT nicer 28 ABOUT INE DISDIGY scceeessesvsnescacaccavenssavexsccecevesseseseesciusceseeeemoectessecsenetocnxe 29 Understanding the Main and Related Screens cccccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeesseeseesesaaeeeeees 29 Convenient FUNCTIONS cccccccscsssscscscsccccccccscsccscccccscsecscccccscsscscscsesesess GO Listening to Ine Demo SOM GS istered al ected aha ll aia aiean a R aaa 33 Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection ccccccccccceseseeeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessseneeeeeeeas 35 Mosc ASSIST PUNCH OM ed casedicioteteedastede Seda iacice EEA 37 IW SICVASSISIGIIE OC ONC gts eah init Sst alia tabaaecienn deeeeded eet let canet ded dote edad adies Leunended 39 ADOUT Ine QUICK Guide FUMGHON rerin ra erect nee a A aie 5 saanteta dts A Aboul Tine Midex ICI aos ites stirs etait ene T aan nneanee tes ateia ds 42 Cean Mold ae 0 aeeene nee ee nna Or Teme E Dinner Renee ey ea nae ee nee eee 44 Contents Selecting and Playing Sound ccsssssssccsscccssssssscceccccesssssssccsrecees Sie ili e Pagel c Om nee ete ee A ene ere en OL eens Rea Reamer el rere Sere ene ener cee eee
158. e following screen appears Song File Copy OI SOG Da D u EZA 7 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media the location of the performance song you want to copy If you want to copy a performance song from USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to copy a performance song from floppy disk select Disk 8 Touch lt 0 lt W to select the performance song you want fo copy If you choose lt Copy All gt all performance data stored in MEMO the currently selected folder of the USB memory or floppy disk will be copied in a single operation 9 Touch Favorites lt g gt lt M to select the copy destination number Numbers for which a song name is shown already have a song saved to them 1 0 Touch lt Execute gt The copying of the song to Favorites begins When copying ends the in the screen will change to the song name that you copied If you select a number in which a song is already saved a screen like the following will appear A Clear Song 0K Cancel If you want to delete the previously saved song and overwrite it with the song you re newly saving touch lt OK gt If you don t want to delete the previously saved song touch lt Cancel gt then select a number at which no song has been saved and copy the song to that number 177 Aeig no 24M yorg Bulhe 4 Bulpiooey u Recording Playing Back What You Play Cop
159. e moment you play the keyboard the Intro will begin and then the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will play Press a Registration button from 1 through 4 to switch the panel settings Press the Intro Ending or Start Stop button to stop the Rhythm To end the Music Assistant function press the One Touch Program button extinguishing its indicator u Convenient Functions Music Assistant Search You can specify a song name and other search terms and use these for a Music Assistant search 1 Touch lt Music Assistant gt on the Main screen MEMO If another screen is open touch The Music Assistant screen appears lt Main gt to access the main screen Music Assistant 8 Ball A Good Mood A Nighttime Bird Song 2 Touch lt Search gt A sub window appears Music Assistant Searching by Music Assistant Name 3 Touch lt By Name PE Search By Name as A J Sound KBD Si ABC DEF _ cH KL mo Biia EA ea hc 39 SUOI OUN JUSIUBAUOD Convenient Functions 4 6 Decide which character you will use for the search Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A Ba CT Touch lt ABC 123 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals The selected character appears in the middle o
160. e next If the CD s data format does not match the ATELIER s settings Type B a beep will sound Commercial Audio CD CDs other than those SIEREQ designed for use with the piano player piano Note that certain commercially available CDs cannot be played back on the ATELIER 7 Touch lt Exit gt 209 sBulles 194 0 snoue Various Other Settings Adjusting the Timing of a Player Piano CD s Piano Sound and Accompaniment With some player piano CDs the piano and accompaniment sounds may not be synchronized properly In such instances you can adjust the timing of the piano sounds so that they are in time with the accompaniment 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt E gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears 4 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the CD Audio Sync Rec Play Options CD Audio Sync Rec Play Options CD Audin_Svne 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 0 100 7 Touch lt Exit gt 210 EA Other Settings Adjust the Standard Pitch Master Tune The basic pitch of an instrument is generally considered as the pitch of the middle A note The Master Tune parameter lets you adjust this basic pitch to match the pitch of any other instruments that are playing together with the ATELIER 1 Touch lt S
161. e that you wish to delete EMO You can touch lt View gt to verify the image MEMO Numbers for which Blank is shown have no image E ui I ull 5 Touch lt Clear gt The following screen appears N Clear BMP File 0K Cancel To cancel without deleting the image touch lt Cancel gt 6 Touch lt OK gt The image will be deleted r Once the image has been deleted the screen will indicate M EMO j Blank urna Various Other Settings 5 Touch lt OK gt Copying Data from q Floppy A screen like the one below appears allowing you to specify a name for the folder Disk to USB Memory ii All songs and Registration data saved on a floppy disk can be copied to USB memory Rhythms and image data cannot be copied Songs and Registrations inside folders will not be copied If you want to copy this data move the song or Registration data out of the folder 1 Make preparations for the copy Connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Memory If you re copying all songs and Registrations to USB memory a folder will be created in the USB memory connector Into the floppy disk drive insert the flo K een and the data will be saved in this folder disk containing the data you want to copy Connect your USB memory to the External Memo 6 Touch the character select button EECA to switch among uppercase
162. easures from which the data will be erased 15 Touch lt gt lt gt to set For the number of measures from which the data will be erased If you wish to erase to the last measure bar set for ALL 16 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 7 Touch lt Execute gt The following display appears A Erase Event 0K Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 1 8 Touch lt OK gt to erase the performance data Once the performance data has been erased you are returned to the Erase Event screen 183 geq SOUBWOL8Y jedIsnyy no Bunipy Editing Your Musical Performance Data Be Bee o n Copying Measures Copy This function lets you copy a portion of recorded song to a different measure bar location in the same track If a recording already exists at the copy destination it will be erased Example To copy measures bars 5 7 to measure bar 8 ae Ya a DEFE Sa Xa Sa 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen a Ses Se V The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play ATELIER 01 HEE eel rt Be oH Solo Control opoopo Reset Stop Play Rec Bwd Fwd 2 Inthe Rec Play screen touch lt gt Utility to open the Utility screen Song Select Punch In Out Save Delete sie 3 Inthe Utility screen touch lt Edit gt The Edit Menu screen
163. ecay to each voice after the keys The Sustain effect will not be The Sustain effect can be added to the Upper except the Solo part Lower applied to the Solo part voice are released and Pedal voices When Applying Sustain to the Pedal Part co Pedal MEMO Sustain The length of Sustain can be CE modified independently for each part p 135 1 Press the Pedal Sustain button to make the indicator light The Sustain effect is applied to the voices of the Pedal Bass part When Applying Sustain to the Upper Part and Lower Part 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen e 4 Transpose x AEE E gt Biggest Band R egis 9 Registration amp 3 Rhythm J System Quick Guide The Sound Keyboard screen appears Sound Keyboard Org Theater Ens Orch BrassSect aia Lower Organ2 os Tr Trumpet J oe Orem SS ee Drea Bass p Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint a vn E 133 punos y 0 s1294 snoneg BulAiddy a Applying Various Effects to the Sound 2 5 134 ENAN Touch either lt Upper gt or lt Lower gt You can touch lt Pedal gt to Indication Description access the Pedalboard screen and change the sustain settings Upper To apply sustain to the Upper part eike podalpan Lower To apply sustain to the Lower part Touch lt J lt J to display the Sustain Touch the Sustain setting to switch between ON
164. eccececuseucesenceees 198 Pedalboard Polyphony cccccceesseeceeeeeeeeees 198 PELCUS SION aan 56 Performance Recommended Tones 0scsscescesceseeceeceecs 238 PCG Se Saath Meee a ap Decibateh shai serdar tee 227 HIS cise eee hos ac ae ce eaten IE ATT 23 Pills DONC rseisccde sce retest erecta a a A 251 Pitch Bend Range scccr ant tewst iene tacseitneinens 201 Pitch Bend Vibrato ccccecccceceecececcececeuceeencs 119 Playback Transpose Sitcdath iadaeieenanttsstaenin he ncacetedinn 206 Playing DEMO SONG eire e EE 33 Performance Song 2etka i ioadas Sitesi hia Lace 164 Performance Songs Stored on Floppy Disk 156 RANI ea 75 Power OD arcoachnitaisadareeivadd abtabadthawyblaedietdasdbenedins 2 Produce a Sound Effect D Beam Controller cccccceseesceceeceuceceecs 142 Punch in Recording cccccesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeanee ees 174 Q QUICK Gude acaba dae setae T E a 4 Index menu o nonsnnssooosnsnsosononsnonsosisonororrrrrsene gt 42 Main Sareen oerni AAT EN 30 gt Oo 5 Q O D 0 xX pu Index CUTER RegistiatiOm etsea e 35 MAIM DEEN aea icant eaeeatediale 29 R Rec Play Main SCION oeracirene rs EES 30 Recall REGIS ON osian e E E EN 98 Recommend Tone 2 chce lt cndsdealstuiearicartoanatadanvades 238 REC OGIO eatae EE E T 153 Each Part Separately wsancciskedicetiieaiea 165 Performance aiyede E 163 ReRecordiNO ssena a 166 Recording onto SMF siivcweas tcceua
165. ector If you want to initialize a floppy disk connect your floppy disk drive sold separately to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk 2 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen 3 Touch lt go to Save gt The Registration Save screen appears 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media Choose Ext Memory if you want to initialize USB memory or choose Disk if you want to initialize a floppy disk 5 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 6 Touch lt Format gt The Format screen appears A Format 0K Cancel If you touch lt Cancel gt you will return to the Registration Save screen without formatting 7 Touch lt OK gt to start formatting When the format is finished the Registration Save screen returns 220 Never attempt to remove the USB memory until formatting is complete n Displaying a Graphic at Power up The ATELIER allows you to load a favorite graphic into internal memory and have it be displayed when the power is turned on Size Color Format Name Use your computer to create a graphic image file that meets the following criteria 800 x 480 pixels 24 bit colors Image saved in BMP format 1 8 characters in length lowercase is ok A filename extension of BMP must be added after the name The following characters can be used to name an image ABCDEFGHI
166. ed 195 swy yy puowuedwoovoy jeuibuo Bulyeai5 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms ENAN Deleting Rhythms You Have Created This deletes User Rhythms created by partially editing the internal Rhythms 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears Jo _ 3 Touch lt Clear gt The following screen appears A Clear Rhythm 0K To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 4 If you are sure that you wish to delete the Rhythm touch lt OK gt Saving the User Rhythm Changing the Name of a User Rhythm Rename 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 2 Touch lt i gt Utility The Utility screen appears 196 3 Touch lt Save gt The Rhythm Save screen appears gt J Rhythm Save 4 4 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears 5 Touch the character select button S ABC abo D to switch among uppercase lowercase symbols Touch the character select button repeatedly to cycle through the available choices like this uppercase gt lowercase gt symbols gt uppercase 6 Touch the screen to specify the desired character The following characters can be selected Upper ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU Ppercase VWXYZ Lowercase abcdefghijklmnopgrstuvwxyz I amp 2 _01234 Symbols 56789
167. ed MEMO to initialize format it on the ATELIER For details refer to Formatting a USB Memory Format p 220 26 Rotating the External Memory Connector Holder The External Memory connector holder rotates 90 degrees left and right Rotating the External Memory connector holder allows you to avoid damaging the connected external memory if something happens to bump against it 1 Grasp the External Memory connector holder and turn it 90 degrees to the left or right oto Lio Ao UUS Lio i G iili M l Ih i External Memory a HAE Holder Lee vl 90 seen SE i degrees to the left to the right Security Slot Be sure to grasp the External Memory connector holder itself when rotating it Never rotate the External Memory NOTE connector holder by holding the connected external memory Take care not to allow your fingers to become pinched NOTE f when rotating the External Memory connector holder MEMO Security Slot K http www kensington com Connecting the Floppy Disk Drive Attach the floppy disk drive as shown the figure using the mounting holes on the ATELIER s bottom panel m For details of the attachment refer to the owner s manual of M EMO the floppy disk drive 1 Connect the USB cable of the floppy disk drive to the ATELIER s Ext Drive connector Ext Drive Connector USB Cable Before You Start Playing 27
168. eeeeeeeseeenens 14 Modiyingihe SOUR Gl sereen E ee 141 Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Produce a Sound Effect 142 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively ssscccccssssscssscessssscereeessssee 144 Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard ccccccccccccccceeeeseeceeeeseeseeeeeeeseeuaaeeseeeeees 144 Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard Solo To Lower Button 0ccccceeeeeees 146 Changing How the Solo Voice Respond c0 cc 5i s0chenssseeseee ects adeaeaeetace rea deaeteteeeaes 147 Layering the Solo Voice and Lower Voice xseseicdictac ics eiieecrtonntdtaedean ween etaaees 147 Changing ne Solo Split Poirier e E E AET AEEA 148 Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Bass Split cccceeccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaees 149 Changing the Bass Split POM nhc 66a nth nS it nec vecnns ved obra roars heed Grd hie ae eaavane 151 Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Pedal To Lower Button c00eeeee 152 13 Contents Recording Playing Back What You Play csssssssscsssssssrreeesssseee 153 WV ING AS Cr NCCC BOMOMS innr Aneesh eat tednetenee anal cesta E crak ieee saci 154 Displaying tne Track BUNOMS 222 sete Sala entices teen E 155 Playing Back Performance Songs Stored on USB Memory and SMF Music Files 0066 156 Silencing a Specific Track Track Mufe iaiccet canicetenceraruatd seamen eestisyanstedaute
169. een some lyrics or notes could extend A a i E beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed When you touch Key setting button the following screen e The notations that are presented by the display are PA produced based on the music files Viewing ease is given priority over precise expression when dealing with complex high level music Because of this you may find Maraton Pues that the notation shown in the display does not match what is provided on commercially available sheet music The notation display feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult complex musical works that demand accurate notation In addition the display cannot show notes that are briefer than a sixteenth note TOR SO vajn e f you select a part that does not contain performance data notes will not be displayed in the notation Use lt Option gt to change the part that is displayed e If you use the buttons located below the display to change the displayed part while the song is playing the song may be played back from the beginning NO S aM The Key screen is composed of two screens Touch lt Maj Min gt to switch between the two screens MEMO 6 Touch lt Exit gt 162 Recording Playing Back What You Play Recording a Performance You can record the performance that you play You can also record your performance while playing Rhythms or A
170. eeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 106 LGaaingsa Sel OF REGIstr hon S searre en n a EA 106 Loading an Individual REGISHGHOMians cncosconsiwescaneateteadeaieautaseideadeateaatadaatenatereesesees 107 Deleting Set of REGIS GHONSi 20s co2s5daisaensscmesaonadasentasesaesaganse condaanteachnemannnamemeodasesentmiaaa 110 Changing the Name or Order of Registration cccccccceeeeceeceeeeseeeceeeeseeseaeeeseeeeeaaaae sees 112 Copying Regishtahons seiss teiiresnsenebientri ren nn a Er E E R i a e E 114 Using the Performance Functions cccsssssccsccsssssscecccessssscccccesseee LIZ Transposing to a Different Key Key Transpose ccccccccccceeseeeeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeees 117 Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound cccccccccccccee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeees 118 Adding Decay to the Sound Damper Pedal cciccscscaceicananswcmsonaniesicnansistadainse densa ranrencnceuenives 118 Using the Pitch BEnGy Vil ORAlOs LV ees tasecacdoncieh caused eect atisenierin eu nlomaslonactaciaaiead feeuien sectesmatmmbetadst 119 Usina MEFOS o WHCING Sean a S E dene eum eetasee 120 Changing the Function of the Foot Switch ccccccccceesseecceeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeeeenies 121 Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations ccccccceesseeeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeees 122 Adjusting the Overall Volume Using an Expression Pedal cccccccccsseeeeceesseeeeeeessneeeeees 123 Adjusting
171. egistration is selected 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the Send PC Switch System send PC Switch Bank MSB Bank LSB PC Number 3 Touch the Send PC Switch setting to switch between ON and OFF Each time you touch the Send PC Switch setting it will alternate between ON and OFF Setting Description ON PC numbers are transmitted OFF PC numbers are not transmitted 4 Touch lt Exit gt iib This setting remains stored in memory even while power is lmam turned off 211 s uI S 194 0 snoue Various Other Settings iran Setting the PC Number You can specify the Program Change number that will be transmitted from MIDI Out connector when a Registration is selected 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the Bank MSB Bank Select MSB Bank LSB Bank Select LSB or PC Number Program Change Number X System send PC Switch Bank MSB Bank LSB PC Number 3 Touch either lt Bank MSB gt lt Bank LSB gt or lt PC Number gt setting 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Menu Setting Bank MSB 0 127 Bank LSB 0 127 PC Number 1 128 5 Touch lt Exit gt 212 MIDI IN Mode This instrument contains two sound generators one for GM2 GS data playb
172. egistration that you wish to load into internal memory Touch lt 9 gt utility The Utility screen appears ME Registration Load ul 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 05 REGIST 05 acinar 210 Go co Touch lt Load One gt The Load One Registration screen appears BE Load One Registration ee B50 DDDB roof Cancel Touch lt 1 gt lt 12 gt to select the number of the Registration button that you wish to load into internal memory BE Load One Registration eit id REGIST 02 LL Internal ooon oon Hf 0g diiin e o ni 12 Cancel Seen UY CEMA Using the Registration Buttons Touch Internal lt 1 gt lt 8 gt to select the number of the storage destination button BS Load One Registration 5088 5005 E To cancel this operation touch lt Cancel gt When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt The following display appears Executing When the Registration has been loaded the Registration Load screen will reappear 109 suong uolnejsibey y BulsN a Using the Registration Buttons EMAA ATCA AAA Deleting a Set of Registrations 110 Here s how to delete a Registration set that was saved to a USB memory User memory p 218 or floppy disk Prepare the Registration that you want to delete If you want to delete Registration
173. egistrations currently in the memory of the ATELIER To save the Method 2 Registrations you are currently using refer to Saving Registration Sets p 103 NOTE 1 Turn down the volume to the minimum level then turn off the power If you want to restore settings other than those for User Memory p 72 to the factory set condition touch lt Panel NOTE Reset gt in the System Utility screen If you want to restore 2 While holding down the One Touch only the user memory to the factory set condition refer to Program button press the Power On 1 switch to turn the power on One Touch Program Power On page 218 The following screen appears Factory Preset is Loading 25 Before You Start Playing Using the External Memory Songs you record on the ATELIER and Registration sets you create can be copied to separately available USB memory for safekeeping You can also copy songs to a floppy disk using a separately sold floppy disk drive p 87 p 114 p 177 You can also play back SMF music files saved on USB memory or a floppy disk p 156 Use USB memory and floppy disk drive available from Roland Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if other USB device is used Connecting the USB Memory 1 Connect the USB memory to the External Memory connector Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in until it is firmly in place If you re using new USB memory or floppy disk you ll ne
174. en you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 7 Touch the Time value the number of times that the data will be copied 1 8 Touch lt gt lt gt to set Time the number of times that the data will be copied 19 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 20 Touch lt Execute gt The following display appears A Copy 0K Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 21 Touch lt OK gt to copy the measures Once the measures have been copied you are returned to the Copy screen Correct Timing Inaccuracies Quantize You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by having the music be aligned with a timing you specify This is called Quantizing For example even if you intend to play at quarter note timing the notes may be slightly earlier or later than precise quarter note intervals In this case if you quantize at quarter note timing you can correctly match the Rhythms 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play ATELIER O1 ii a Sggegoo Solo ono ofaj 2 Inthe Rec Play screen touch lt Utility to open the Utility screen g yi i 44 Rec Play y Se er 3 In the Utility screen touch lt Edit gt The Edit Menu screen appears Edit Menu eeg SOURWJOLEeY jeoIsnyy I
175. ence function is ON p 80 What is Sync Start If the Arranger function is ON the Arranger On Off button indicator is lit it is not be able Sync Start is a function that starts the Rhythm at the moment that you play the lower keyboard or pedalboard to start the Rhythm by playin What is Chord Intelligence iha sedalboard ip 78 ai Chord Intelligence is a feature that intelligently decides on accompaniment chords the moment you play some keys specifying a chord during Automatic Accompaniment The panel settings specified by the One Touch Program function are as follows 8 panel settings for each Rhythm 4 panel settings x 2 groups 2 Group Orchestra 1 Group Band Rhythm ENN Select a Rhythm p 71 Press the One Touch Program button The One Touch Program button s indicator will light One Touch Program L2 An One Touch Program Group One Touch Program Group select screen like the one shown below will be displayed e Transpose C G Orchestra S Rhythm 10 System 0 Quick Guide While the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed touch the screen to select a One Touch Program group If you fail to select a One Touch Program group while the One Touch Program Group screen is displayed Basic will be selected automatically Panel settings appropriate for the Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will
176. eo MEMO If you want to use a CD or the CD drive refer to Using a CD p 28 You can t copy music CD songs to Favorites It will take a certain amount of time until a music CD can be selected You can also play or stop the music data by touching lt Play gt or lt Stop gt in the Rec Play screen and you can touch lt Bwd gt or lt Fwd gt to rewind or fast forward the playback 239 aa oapi pue sIsnyy BuiAoluy Enjoying Music and Video a Re Etta Enjoying Karaoke with a Music CD Center Cancel N O UB WO DN You can minimize the vocal sounds of a commercially available music CD NOTE and sing the vocal part yourself This is a convenient way to enjoy karaoke or For some songs the vocal practice soloing with a favorite music CD polinada nehpecriminche completely Connect a commercially available CD drive to the Ext Drive connecior Insert the music CD you want to use into the CD drive and select the song you want to sing p 239 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears Touch lt Utility gt Touch lt VIMA TUNES gt The VIMA TUNES screen appears Touch the Melody lt Mute gt on the screen The Center Cancel function is active Touch lt gt to start playing back the song When you play back the song the sound of the melody or vocal will be minimized This lets you perform the melody portion your
177. erent es 46 Apourhe Voices Gnd PAN Sxtiesstetetanttesneciata rtd vee teste lie nad nants S 46 Functions of the Upper Lower Pedal Bass Sound Select Buttons cccceeeeceeeeee anes 47 Selecting the Upper and Lower Voices ccccccccceeeeeccee ee eeeeeee saa eeeeee saa eeeeeeeaaeeeeeenies 48 DE lECHING Pedal Bass Vole marsin e a a eine aeantad EE 49 Selechng 90o VOE arena ea Reem E S E E 50 Selecting a Voice Using the Others Button cx cccteusieovcsnvensiceiee de dadeanteacincemiae eu 51 Creating Organ Sounds Vintage Organ aisha ecetaen aeisaer ais cecsinneat cater de decint Arata tape dea eas acaed 53 Playing a Vintage Organ VOCE rpasis asunarmadeatanicuasenesiaueteedeenestanasehees 55 Performing with an Active Expression Voice ince wus Astwosas abe nenavtasghdauarty casenenduudesumacesestuenseuue 59 Performing with a Human Voice sn neesssssssesnnnnnussssssrrrerrrerssssssrrrrrirresrsssssrrrrerereesnssrren 60 Adjust the Volume Balan 6 ecicdadcivnrih assis tienhenesaeebiieddaiddaandadaieleaddanaalsahaolelneadanbtcatind 62 Transpose the Pitch in Octave Units Octave Shift cccccccccccceesseeccecceeeseeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeeeas 64 Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard Drums SFX 06 66 Changing Drome SEA oead arane n EN E 67 Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase Manual Percussion 68 Changing the Manual Percussion cetsai6ciicis
178. ernal display connected to the ATELIER Touch lt gt to stop playing back the song Viewing the ATELIER s screen to check the image that s shown on your external display You can view the ATELIER s screen to check the image that s shown on your external display Press the Video Monitor button getting its indicator to light up The Video Monitor button indicator will alternate between on lit and off dark each time it is pressed Video Monitor The ATELIER s display will show the same image as shown on your external display 237 aa Ospi pue asn GulAofuy Enjoying Music and Video ae Performing with Sounds that Match the Song Recommended Tones 238 When playing along on keyboard while listening to a CDROM made for the VIMA VIMA TUNES this function lets you play on Upeer keyboard using instrumental sounds that are appropriate for the atmosphere of the selected song If you select a song from a CD ROM created for VIMA VIMA TUNES three recommended tones will automatically be selected in the VIMA TUNES screen You can use these three sounds to perform sounds that will match the character of that song When you want to select a song from a CD ROM made for the VIMA VIMA TUNES insert the CD ROM into the CD drive Select the song of VIMA CD ROM p 239 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears Touch lt Utility gt
179. es to a single power outlet In particular when using a power strip exceeding the rated capacity watts amps of the power strip may cause heat to be generated possibly melting the cable Avoid extended use at high volume This device either by itself or used in conjunction with headphones amps and or speakers is capable of producing volume levels that can cause permanent hearing damage If you experience impaired hearing or ringing in your ears immedi ately stop using the device and consult a medical specialist Do not insert foreign objects Never allow foreign objects flammable objects coins wires etc to enter this device This can cause short circuits or other malfunctions GO USING THE UNIT SAFELY Turn off the power if an abnormality or malfunction occurs If any of the following should occur immediately turn off the power disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet and contact your dealer or a service center to have the device serviced e The power cord is damaged e The device produces smoke or an unusual smell e A foreign object enters the device or liquid spills into the device e The device becomes wet by rain etc e An abnormality or malfunction occurs in the device Do not allow children to use without supervision In households with children take particular care against tampering If children are to use this device they must be supervised or guided by an adult Do not drop
180. essing the Foot Switch Notes played on the Lower keyboard will be sustained only while you continue pressing the Foot Switch Turns the foot switch function off 121 SUOI OUN BOURBWJOLEd au BuIsn Using the Performance Functions n Using the Foot Switch to Switch Registrations You can use the Foot Switch as a dedicated switch for selecting Registrations in order The Registration will be switched each time you press the foot switch The Registration Shift settings are stored to each individual Registration Set When RIGHT Load Next is assigned to the foot switch and the Load Next function is used to switch Registration Sets saved to a USB memory or floppy disk set the Registration Shift setting to RIGHT Load Next for all saved Registrations 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears 3 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the Registration Shift ejanude lisia L Foot Switch R Foot Switch 1 Rec Play Registration Shift Damper Pedal 4 Touch the Registration Shift setting OFF RIGHT LEFT RIGHT Load Next 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 6 Touch lt Exit gt cab This setting remains stored in memory even while the power lmm is turned off Setting Description You can use a function assigned
181. et PERC SET 1 PERC SET 2 ORCHESTRA SET LATIN SET VOICE PHRASE SFX SET Press the Manual Percussion button once again The Manual Percussion button indicator will change from blinking to lit and your choice of drum set will be finalized Selecting and Playing Sounds MEMO Refer to Manual Percussion List Appendix separate booklet for details on which percussion sound will be played by each note The Manual Percussion screen will automatically close after several seconds if you do not touch the screen to select a manual percussion set If you wish to change the manual percussion set you must select a manual percussion set quickly while the manual percussion screen is displayed MEMO You can also confirm the Manual Percussion set by touching lt Exit gt in the Manual Percussion screen You can also play the lower manual to confirm the manual percussion set 69 spunos 6bulAe g pue Burjo9ajes Selecting and Playing Sounds Sustaining Notes in the Lower Part Lower Voice Hold You can have Lower voice continue to sound after you release you fingers from the keys until the next key is played 1 Hold down the Pedal To Lower button for several seconds until its indicator begins blinking MEMO Level REME 7 _ The Pedal To Lower button is Organ String ON simultaneously A _ _ Y i Alternatef To Lower J Pedal The following message appear
182. evice contains wooden components wipe the entire area following the direction of the grain The finish may be damaged if you continue strongly rubbing a single location If water droplets should adhere to this device immediately wipe them off using a soft dry cloth Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner or alcohol since these can cause deformation or color change Servicing If you return this device for servicing the contents of memory may be lost Please store important contents on USB memory or make a note of the contents We take utmost care to preserve the contents of memory when performing service but there may be cases when the stored content cannot be recovered because the memory section has malfunctioned Please be aware that we cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of lost memory content or for any consequences of such loss Other Cautions Stored content may be lost due to a malfunction of the device or because of inadvertent operation You should back up important content on USB memory as a safeguard against such loss We cannot accept responsibility for the recovery of any content lost from internal memory or USB memory or for the consequences of such loss Do not apply excessive force to the buttons knobs or input output jacks since this may cause malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display A small amount of noise may be heard from the display during normal oper
183. external display or television letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show This device the AT 500 is not able to display images on a television screen SMF Music Files SMFs Standard MIDI Files use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device An enormous variety of music is available whether it be for listening for practicing musical instruments for Karaoke etc SMF with Lyrics SME SMF with Lyrics refers to SMF Standard MIDI File that contains the lyrics When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device one bearing the same logo the lyrics will appear in its display The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2 GS sound generators 252 E About the ATELIER Sound Generator The ATELIER come equipped with GM 2 GS sound generators GENERAL General MIDI M ey The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance GENERA L General MIDI
184. ey acrorshdsastodistses E EA EE 82 A Simple Way to Make Automatic Accompaniment Settings One Touch Program 5 84 Wsing ea Rhythm frm a USB Memory seuss aaccecoxsaanestecussasbian niser a raai iaaio E 86 Reviewing the Rhythms on USB Memory cccceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee esa eeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeaeas 86 CODY ING UR MYM S orines r a besa aaa a a ERE 87 Changing the Order of the Saved Rhythms cccccccecsseeeececceeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeseessaeeseeeeeeas 90 Renamingva Saved RINM erinnrn a E E oe ae 92 Deleting Saved RE YANN ereraa a a eacleas 94 Using the Registration Buttons ssseoeeessssssoceessssssoceceeessssoceeeesssssseeeee DO SHOR MCHC B TOONS aese a N E tevsioergeeiecietonees 97 Recalling a Regi kan ON esae E E ree nr eRe aD 98 How to Recall a Registration DELAYED cccccccceeecccee see eeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaaeeeeees 98 How to Recall a Registration INSTANT ssetscectec tee tacustenteriuacteaiterdedideadsauia dee eaetnese 98 Changing the Timing of Recalling Registrations cccccccccceesesececceeeeaseeeeseeeeeesseeeeees 99 Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings cccccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeees 100 12 Contents Assigning a Name to a Registration Del sta ectasccsve nd ean dnacdre te ceevare ewes soaude a Eia 101 SAVING REGIS ANON CIS s E N 103 Loading Previously Saved Registration Sets Into the ATELIER cccceeecceceee
185. f the screen Touch lt Start gt Start Search The results of the search appear in the display To cancel the search touch lt Exit gt in the Search Results screen Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Music Assistant screen Searching by Conditions EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE SE EE EE EE E E E O o O o O O O o O O O e O O e e e E e O E E O O e ee e e e e e O E E a e e UO 3 40 Touch lt By Conditions gt You can use four different criteria in searches Tempo Rhythm Genre and Scene Tempo Rhythm Genre Scene Touch the value for the search term Touch lt gt lt gt to adjust the settings Touch lt Exit gt Touch lt Start gt Start Search MEMO The results of the search appear in the display To cancel the search touch lt Exit gt in the Search Results screen Any Touch a Music Assistant name to select a Music Assistant Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Music Assistant screen NANN LNU If you don t need to specify any search conditions choose Se Convenient Function About the Quick Guide Function The ATELIER offers a Quick Guide function which makes it easy for you to access various functions While the Quick Guide screen is displayed you can press the keyboard a button or a foot switch to jump to the related setting screen Touch lt
186. f you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in USB memory Choose Disk if you want to change the name of the Rhythms saved in floppy disk Touch lt H lt to select the Rhythm whose name you want to change NTT Using Rhythm Performance AAAA LALALALA 6 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears 7 Touch lt HEI gt to change among uppercase lowercase symbols Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice like this uppercase gt lowercase gt symbols gt uppercase 8 Touch the screen to specify the desired character The following characters can be selected Uppercase Lowercase Symbols Del Space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz I amp 2 _ 0123456789 Delete a character Insert a space sj 2 Move the cursor the symbol that indicates the location at which characters will be input to left or right To cancel the operation touch lt Cancel gt 9 When you re done making the settings touch lt OK gt The Rhythm has now been named The Edit User screen reappears 10 Touch lt Exit gt 93 SOURWUOLed WyMyy Buisn aa Using Rhythm Performance 7 e AMAA Deleting Saved Rhythm You can delete Rhythms stored in User memory p 72 or USB memory 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen
187. formation about For example in order to make the instrument detect a C Major chord you ener nngenng erecta ine must normally play the three keys C E and G If you use the Chord See een Intelligence function you can simply press a single C key in the lower keyboard to sound a C Major chord with the voice selected for the Lower part 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen MEMO You can also open the Rhythm The Rhythm screen appears screen by pressing a Rhythm button Rhythm a a rs sr ome CETME es cr 2 Touch lt Ep gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears 80 stmt Using Rhythm Performance 3 Touch lt Options gt Nein The Rhythm Options screen appears When the Leading Bass function p 82 is on and the Chord Intelligence function is Rhythm Options off you can specify chords with a combination of the lower Chord Intelligence OFF keyboard and pedalboard Chord Hold ON Leading Bass OPE a Count Down Sound VOICE So Sa ee 4 Touch the Chord Intelligence setting to turn it ON The Chord Intelligence function can now be used Each time you touch the Chord Intelligence setting it will be switched ON OFF Touch Program button the If you press the root note of the chord p 251 in the lower keyboard when z the Chord Intelligence function is ON all notes in that
188. forms GS music files music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos XGlite Xe XGlite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects in addition to the General MIDI specification XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator However keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off Settings That Are Stored After the Power Is Turned Off Arranger Update Auto Std Tempo Auto Standard Tempo D Beam Sensitivity Exp Curve Expression Curve Lyrics Main Background Main Bouncing Ball Master Tune Metronome Sound Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode Registration Shift Rhythm Mode Rotary Color Rotary Speed Send PC Switch Trans Update Transpose Update USB Driver Registration Name Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons Registration Name Registration Shift Arranger Update Trans Update Transpose Update Exp Curve Expression Curve Rhythm Mode Settings That Are Stored In the Individual Registration Buttons Re
189. g ON OFF to switch it between ON OFF Each time you touch the Count In Rec setting it will alternate between ON OFF Setting Description ON A two measure count will sound before recording OFF No count will sound before recording 6 Touch lt Exit gt urna Recording Playing Back What You Play Copying Performance Song Performance songs and SMF music files from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to Favorites user memory If a performance song saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in Favorites the stored performance song will not disappear even when you turn off the power It is convenient to load frequently used performance song into Favorites Performance songs saved in Favorites can also be copied to USB memory or floppy disk Copying Performance Songs from USB Memory to Favorites 1 Connecting the USB memory to the External Memory connector 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 3 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 4 Touch lt Song Select gt The Song Select screen appears Song Select 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 _ O4 ATELIER 04 05 ATELIER 05 vy LY File Edit 9 Touch lt File Edit gt The Song File Edit screen appears Song File Edit 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 04 ATELIER 04 O5 ATELIER 05 _ 7 6 Touch lt Copy gt Song Copy Th
190. g Voices You can play the sounds of various instruments on the ATELIER These sounds are called Voices About the Voices and Parts The ATELIER has two manual keyboards and a pedalboard From top to bottom these are called the Upper Keyboard Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard Three parts Organ Orchestral and Vintage Organ are assigned to the Upper and Lower keyboards respectively and you can select one voice from each part Plus with the addition of the Solo part voice you can have up to Four voices playing simultaneously the Solo voice can be played in either the Upper or Lower keyboard The Pedalboard has two parts Pedal and Vintage Organ You can select one voice for each part meaning that it is possible to play up to two voices simultaneously Keyboard Parts Upper Organ MEMP l To play a Solo voice on the Upper Orchestral Lower keyboard select the Solo Upper Keyboard Upper Vintage voice and press the Solo To Solo Lower button p 146 This voice is sounded only when the Solo To Lower button be extinguished Lower Organ Lower Orchestral MEMO Lower Keyboard Lower Vintage If you want to play the pedal Solo bass voice in the lower This voice is sounded only when the Solo To Lower button keyboard set Bass Split to lights up ON p 149 Pedal Pedal PaRa Pedal Vintage 46 Orchestral Alternate To
191. g to switch Setting Description between PEDAL and COMPOSER Each time you touch the Exp Src Rec setting it will The effect is applied to the voices played on the alternate between PEDAL and COMPOSER TOSTER Upper keyboard The effect is applied to the voices played on the Setting Description ee Lower keyboard Expression Pedal movements will be PEDAL recorded The previous recording will be erased as new songs are recorded 5 Touch lt Exit gt Expression Pedal movements will not be COMPOSER recorded The previous data will remain without being erased 5 Touch lt Exit gt suas 1 440 SNOEN 199 Various Other Settings qua 0 Function During Playback You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will function while ATELIER song files are being played back 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears 3 Touch lt A gt lt gt to display the Exp Src Play Holaiidol Eig Exp Sre Rec Exp Src Play Exp Curve Bender Vibrato 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting PEDAL COMPOSER COMPOSER PEDAL Description The Expression Pedal will function Expression Pedal recording within the song file will also be effective The Expression Pedal will not function The Expre
192. gether with drum sounds or Sound Effects Manual Percussion LZ the keys for Drum sounds or Sound Effects 15 keys Lower Keyboard 1 Press the Manual Percussion button indicator lights The button will alternate between ON lit and OFF dark each time it is It is not possible to select and play both Drums SFX and pressed Manual Percussion buttons The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds simultaneously p 66 Manual Percussion PERG SET 2 SFX SET ORCHESTRA SET LATIN SET 2 When you play the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard the chosen drum sound is played on each key 68 Ec Changing the Manual Percussion Sets You can choose the type of Manual Percussion Set When you change the Manual Percussion Set the sound played by each of the 15 lowest notes of the Lower keyboard will change Immediately after the power is turned on the PERC SET1 drum set will sound Press the Manual Percussion button indicator lights The Manual Percussion screen will be displayed for several seconds Manual Percussion PERC SET 2 SEX SCI ORCHESTRA SET LATIN SET While the Manual Percussion screen is displayed touch a manual percussion set name in the screen The Manual Percussion button indicator will begin to flash You can select from 6 different Manual Percussion Sets Manual Percussion S
193. gistrations A convenient way to make the sequence of Registration buttons to be pressed easy to understand is to store the panel settings starting from the Registration 1 button continuing with subsequent buttons in accordance with the progression of the song Save the Registrations to the USB memory or User memory If you want to use more than eight Registrations in a song save the settings for Registration buttons 1 8 to a USB memory or User memory as a set then continue to store further panel settings again starting from Registration button 1 Save all of the Registration sets you have set to the USB memory or user memory Arrange the Registrations in the sequence they are to be used Save the Registration sets to the USB memory or user memory in the order they are to be used in the song You can use the File Edit function p 112 to alter the sequence and names of Registrations contained on the USB memory or User memory p 101 as well as delete such Registrations p 110 Using Registration Sets Call up the Registration sets saved on the USB memory to the ATELIER Insert the USB memory containing the saved Registration sets into the external memory connector and read the Registration sets into the ATELIER Switch the Registration sets as you perform Press the Registration buttons to switch Registrations as you play the song To call up the next Registration Set assign the foot switch to RIGHT Load Next and rec
194. gs ETN Rhythm Settings Turning Chord Hold On Off The Chord Hold function can be switched ON OFF When Chord Hold is ON the Automatic Accompaniment will continue playing even when you lift your hand from the key to play a new chord 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen The Rhythm screen appears ad Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears a Touch lt Options gt The Rhythm Options screen appears 4 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the Chord Hold SS I SM 16 Rhythm Options J Sound KBD Chord Intelligence OFF a 4 Rec Play LSS Chord Hold 0 Leading Bass OFF Count Down Sound VOICE ji 9 Touch the Chord Hold setting to switch between ON and OFF Each time you touch the Chord Hold setting it will alternate between ON and OFF Setting Description The Automatic Accompaniment determined by ON the chord played on the Lower keyboard is held even if you release the keys When you release the keys that you played in the Lower keyboard the Automatic Accompaniment will stop be muted Only the Rhythm drum performance will continue OFF 6 Touch lt Exit gt 202 Changing the Intro Countdown Sound Count Down Sound You can change the sound that is used for the count played at the end of the intro with the Intro Countdown function p 78 1 Touch
195. gs Half note Quarter note Quarter note triplet d ds 8th note 8th note triplet 16th note D D A 16 note triplet 32th note ds A 16 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 7 Touch lt Execute gt The following display appears A Quantize 0K Cancel To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 1 8 Touch lt OK gt to have the quantization carried out When the quantizing is finished you are returned to the Quantize screen Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms You can create a Rhythm for use when Rhythm Mode is set to S SERIES p 203 An original Rhythm of your own is created by starting with one of the internal Rhythms then modifying it You can edit some of the internal Rhythms to create your own original Rhythms These original Rhythms are called User Rhythms This function is called Rhythm Customize Process for Creating User Rhythms Preparations for Creating User Rhythms Open the Rhythm Customize screen Select the division Load the source Rhythm Make the division settings HH Creating the User Rhythm Edit the Rhythm Change the percussion i Saving the User Rhythm Changing the name of a User Rhythm N Change the Rhythm tempo i Save the User Rhythm to the User Memory or USB Memory Copying the User Rhythm e Copy User Rhythm on USB Memory to the User Memory e Copy User Rhythm on User Memory to the USB Memory 187 swy 4y
196. gs You can restore all of the settings stored in the ATELIER to what they were when the instrument shipped from the factory This function is called Factory Reset 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears X lt System Send PC Switch Bank MSB Bank LSB PC Number 2 In the System screen touch lt Utility gt to open the Utility screen Se Before You Sart Playing The confirmation message appears on screen You can also use the following method to return to the factory set condition Method 1 A Factory Reset 0K 1 Touch lt Quick Guide gt on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen Cancel 2 Press the One Touch Program button If you touch lt Cancel gt the Factory Reset will not be The confirmation message appears on screen performed and you will return to the System screen Bulkejq H8S no 310499 4 When you touch lt OK gt the Factory Reset operation will begin and the settings will A Factory Reset 0K return to the factory set condition Never switch off the power while this operation is in NOTE progress If you touch lt Cancel gt the Factory Reset will not be performed and you will return to the Main screen Executing 3 When you touch lt OK gt the Factory Reset operation will begin and the settings will return to the factory set condition Loading factory default settings will erase any R
197. gt on the Main screen If you touch lt Cancel gt the Panel Reset will not be The System screen appears performed and you will return to the System screen 4 Touch lt OK gt The Panel Reset operation will begin and the settings System Send PC Switch will return to the factory set condition Bank MSB Bank LSB Never switch off the power while this operation is in progress PC Number Executing 2 Inthe System screen touch lt Utility gt to open the Utility screen To reset only the User memory to its original factory settings refer to p 218 If you want to reset all settings to their factory set state refer to p 24 ee NOTE You can also use the following method to open the Panel Reset confirmation screen 1 Touch lt Quick Guide gt on the Main screen to display the Quick Guide screen 2 Press the Harmony Intelligence button The Panel Reset confirmation screen appears sBules 194 0 SNOEN 219 Various Other Settings Formatting a USB Memory Format The process of preparing USB memory or floppy disks so that they can be used with the ATELIER is called initialization formatting In certain cases particularly with floppy disks the media is formatted for a specific type of device If the media format does not match the ATELIER s you will not be able to use that media with the ATELIER 1 Connect the USB memory to the External Memory conn
198. h is played the force applied to the key played and other such information Performance data is transmitted to the ATELIER from music files saved in USB memory and CD ROM and played back without change as songs This is different than a audio CD since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself This makes it possible to change tempos and keys freely allowing you to use it in many different ways Regarding Copyright Use of the internal songs and audio files for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder Please be aware that if you create derivative works that are based on existing copyrighted material such as commercially available SMF music files such works may violate copyright law if used for any purpose other than personal enjoyment Roland takes no responsibility for any copyright violation you may commit by creating such works The ATELIER Allows You To Use the Following Music Files VIMA TUNES VIMA TUNES VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously When data bearing the VIMA TUNES logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected
199. h lt Rhythms other than the internal Rhythms accessed with the icon E E User button The Rhythm 173 W EE does not appear in the display while the User button Rhythms n are displayed 73 vuewIou d Wyyy Buisn Using Rhythm Performance Searching by Rhythm Name 3 4 Touch lt By Name gt Decide which character you will use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching lt ABC gt in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group a BC s Touch lt ABC 123 gt to toggle between alphabets and numerals Touch lt Start gt Start Search The search results appear in the display To cancel the search touch lt Exit gt in the Search Results screen Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Rhythm screen Searching by Conditions 3 74 Touch lt By Conditions gt You can use four different criteria in searches Tempo Beat Groove and Genre Touch the value for the search term Touch lt gt lt gt to adjust the settings Touch lt Start gt Start Search The search results appear in the display To cancel the search touch lt Exit gt in the Search Results screen Touch a Rhythm name to select a Rhythm Touch lt Exit gt to return to the
200. hange the setting Display Description ROOM 1 Simulates the reverb of a conference room ROOM 2 Simulates the reverb of a performance g lounge Dp ROOI Simulates the reverb of a large open i Org g room mii HALL 1 Simulates the reverb of a large concert Um hall cee Bass 1 4 Simulates the reverb of a small concert Halia hali SMALL CHURCH The reverberation of a small church 2 Touch lt Effect gt LARGE CHURCH The reverberation of a large church The Effect screen appears CATHEDRAL The reverberation of a cathedral PLATE Applies a bright metallic reverb Effect DELAY An echo like sound repeated several times punos y 0 s294 snoneg BulAiddy Rotary Speed NORMAL m Similarly to the above but where the Rotary Color BRIGHT c PAN DELAY sound is panned between the left and Reverb Type HALL 2 M right speakers os aeaa It is not possible to modify the delay time delay interval rE when DELAY or PAN DELAY is selected xi 6 Touch lt Exit gt 3 Touch lt m gt lt J gt to display the Reverb Type 137 Applying Various Effects to the Sound iran Changing the Wall Type By changing the type of reverb p 137 you can experience the feeling of performing in various different locations and by changing the Wall Type wall material you can make further adjustments to the way in which reverberation occurs 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt
201. he Registration to floppy disk select Disk If you want to delete from the Registration to user memory select User Touch lt 0 lt to select the Registration that you wish to delete Touch lt Delete gt The following display appears A Delete Registration 0K To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt If you are sure that you wish to delete the Registration touch lt OK gt When the Registration has been deleted the Registration File Edit screen will reappear When a Registration is deleted the deleted Registration name will change to 01 REGIST 01 03 REGIST 03 AA Using the Registration Buttons suong uolejsibey y BusN a Be Bee ows ETNON 0 Using the Registration Buttons Changing the Name or Order of Registration After saving Registrations on USB memory user memory p 218 or floppy disk you can change the order or name of the Registrations or delete a Registration p 110 If you assign the foot switch to RIGHT Load Next p 122 you ll be able to recall Registration sets in the order in which they are stored in USB memory or user memory This function is very convenient when you re getting ready to perform l Prepare the Registration s that you want to rename or sort If you want to rename or sort Registrations saved on USB memory connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector If you want to ren
202. he Rhythm User button confirm that its indicator is lit The Rhythm screen appears Rhytm 118 Connect the USB memory containing the Rhythms to the external memory connector Touch lt gt lt gt to select Ext Memory and see the Rhythms in USB memory The Rhythm screen will show the Rhythms on the USB memory Rhythm eb _ Trad Tango _ MarchingBand EDE Touch the Rhythm screen to select a Rhythm The Start Stop button indicator will blink while the Rhythms are being loaded into internal memory When loading is finished you will be able to play the selected Rhythm Press the Start Stop button The selected Rhythm is played Unauthorized use of commercially available Music Style disk for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws MEMO If you copy Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk into user memory p 72 you ll be able to access those Rhythms simply by pressing the User button p 87 To M EMO If you want to use Rhythms from a floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector MEMO If User is selected the Rhythms saved in User memory p 72 will be shown If Disk is selected the Rhythms saved on the floppy disk will be shown Bec Using Rhythm Performance Copying Rhythms User memory p 72 already contains Rhythms but you can replace
203. he Rhythm in a Selected Measure 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 2 Touch lt Del gt to copy the selected measure a Customize 4 4 Std Close HH Std BD 1 l Short Guiro Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock Rhythm Customize 4 4 E Erase OK measure 1 iW Bo To cancel operation touch lt Cancel gt 3 Touch lt OK gt The selected measure is deleted Son Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Editing the Sounds You can add and erase sounds alter voices and change the velocity 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 Rhythm Customize 4 4 pE sa ERG d J J J Std Close HH eeeceeee oooo Std BD 1 _ Short Guiro _Long Guiro Hi WoodBlock 2 Touch the point on the screen where the sound you want to edit is located When you touch the screen a line appears at the point you touch By holding your finger to the screen and moving it to the left or right you can have the line move along with your finger Std Close HH Std BD 1 Short Guiro Long Guiro __ Hi WoodBlock The information on the location Measure Beat Tick of the line on the screen is displayed When you remove your finger from the screen the Note Edit screen opens and the note positioned at the line in the Rhythm Customize screen is displayed 7 Std Close HH 101 ZJ Note Edit 29 as 1 2 92 Short Guiro 63
204. he Utility screen appears A Overwrite Song 0K 4 Touch lt Song Select gt The Song Select screen appears Song Select If you wish to update the contents of the performance data 1 Touch lt OK gt If you want to save your performance as new data without overwriting the existing data 1 Touch lt Cancel gt to stop the Save operation 2 In the Song Save Song Delete screen select 5 the number that is displayed as a number that currently does not contain performance data Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to load a song from USB memory choose Ext Memory If you want to load a song from floppy 3 Touch lt Save gt disk choose Disk When saving is complete the saved performance name will be displayed 6 Touch lt H lt B to select the performance song that you wish to load into internal memory 170 LL ecording Playing Back What You Pla eT R g Playing Back What You Play Deleting Performance Songs Song Select fig Stored on Favorites or the 01 ATELIER O1 per 02 ATELIER 02 USB Memory 03 ATELIER 03 M necrPiay Ee d You can delete a performance song that was saved onto a CA Registration 05 ATELIER 05 gw I D U gaz Favorites USB memory or floppy disk z If you want to delete a song in USB memory connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you
205. he chord Basic Chord This refers to the most commonly used types of chord which are generally the following six types major chords minor chords minor seventh chords minor seventh 5 chords dominant seventh chords and diminished seventh chords Chord Notes of two or more pitches sounded simultaneously Chords consisting of three notes are called triads and are the most basic type of chord Chorus An effect that adds spaciousness and richness to the sound Ending This is the last part of the accompaniment When you stop playing the Automatic Accompaniment the ATELIER plays an Ending appropriate for the Rhythm Glide An effect that temporarily lowers the pitch and then gradually returns it to normal Intro This is the introductory portion of an Automatic Accompaniment performance When Automatic Accompaniment begins the ATELIER can add an appropriate intro for each Rhythm Inversion When the lowest note of a chord is the root the chord is said to be in root position In contrast forms of a chord in which other notes are the lowest pitch are called inversions Mute To silence a sound The ATELIER provides a Track Mute function that allows you to turn off the track button indicator of a track on which music data has been recorded so that the corresponding track will temporarily be silenced Panel Settings Settings such as sound selections tempo Rotary fast slow Pitch Bend
206. hm press the flashing User button once more The User button stops flashing and remains lit indicating that the Rhythm has been selected 72 er LAA ll m AA MEMO If you wish to copy a Rhythm saved on USB memory to User memory refer to Copying Rhythms p 87 MEMO If you want to restore the original Rhythms that User memory contained at the time the instrument was shipped from the factory refer to Restoring the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings p 218 MEMO If USB memory is connected you can touch lt gt lt gt to select Ext Memory so that Rhythms in the USB memory will be shown To M EMO You can also confirm the Rhythm by touching lt Exit gt in the Rhythm screen sia Using Rhythm Performance Rhythm Search You can search for Rhythm that match the tempo of the song musical genre or other criteria you set You can also search Rhythm using the first character of the Rhythm names 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen MEMO If another screen is open touch Transpose E j lt Main gt to access the main screen O M EMO The following Rhythm screen appears You can also open the Rhythm screen by pressing Rhythm z buttons Rhythm ne oeo LooseBigBand Scat Swing _ Big Serenade Club Swing Fast BigBand Vocal Swing am M EMO You can also search only for 2 Touc
207. hms are saved to the User memory or to USB memory the Tempo lt P gt button If the following screen appears You can save Rhythms after changing the tempo by touching The following screen appears if you select a number to which a Rhythm has already been saved and then touch lt Save gt A Overwrite Rhythm 0K Cancel If you wish to overwrite the Rhythm Touch lt OK gt The Rhythm will be rewritten If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Rhythm 2 Touch lt Cancel gt Rewriting of the Rhythm will be canceled In the Rhythm Save screen select the number that is displayed as a number that currently does not contain Rhythm data Touch lt Save gt 197 swy yy puowuedwoovoy jeuibuo Bueaig Various Other Settings Adjusting How the Instrument Changing the Pedalboard Polyphony Responds You can set the Bass Pedalboard to play simultaneous multiple notes or single notes only Adjusting the Initial Touch Sensitivity 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen This adjusts the amount of the Initial Touch effect applied The Sound Keyboard screen appears Initial Touch is a function that translates the force used in playing the keys into a directly proportional amount of volume 2 Touch lt Pedal gt The Pedalboard screen appears 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to display
208. ian for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For C A US Proposition 65 WARNING This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer birth defects and other reproductive harm including lead For the USA DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Compliance Information Statement Model Name AT 500 Type of Equipment Digital Organ Responsible Party Roland Corporation U S Address 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 Telephone 323 890 3700 Roland 5 1 0 0 0 014 9 7 O 1 5100001497 08 08 1N
209. ices to the ATELIER Using these jacks you can connect other sound and exchange performance data between them generating devices or audio equipment and play sounds from other devices through the ATELIER s speaker 8 USB Connector gt p 229 Used for connecting a computer to the ATELIER using a USB 3 RGB Out Connector gt p 232 You can connect an external display here to view a cable slideshow 4 Phones Jacks gt p 23 Connect headphones here 9 Mic Volume Knob gt p 23 This adjusts the volume when a microphone is connected 227 aa d eUJe1Xy YM Bunosuuog Connecting with External Device Connecting to Audio Equipment You can connect audio devices to play the sound of the ATELIER through the speakers of your audio system or to When connection cables with resistors are used the volume record your performance on a tape recorder or other level of equipment connected to the input jacks may be low recording device If this happens use connection cables that do not contain resistors When connecting please use an audio cable with a MEMO standard phone plug such as the PCS 100PW sold To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other separately devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Connecting Speakers to the ATELIER Turning Off the Power and Outputting Sounds Turn the volume all the way down on the e ee teed n ese eed
210. ility gt or the like in a screen a screen like the following will appear This type of screen is called a sub window ao J Sound KBD K Rec Play IQA Registration M 1 amp re jz About the Display MEMO You can return directly to the main screen by touching lt Main gt shown in the right side of the screen M EMO When you touch a menu in the sub window the sub window will close and the selected menu screen will appear M EMO In a sub window touch lt Exit gt to exit the sub window 31 Aejds q y jnoqy About the Display u Sub windows for Setting Values When you are making settings in the System screen the following type of screen appears 5 A Return to the factory settings Modify the value Controller 4 ee L Foot Switch M EMO 4 Sound KBD If a sub window for you to edit R Foot ST SLOW lt the settings is shown you can lt Rec Play use the Value dial to switch id the settings About the Value Dial 32 The ATELIER has a Value dial You can use the Value dial to change the tempo or edit the settings or to select a file in screens such as the File Edit screen Editing the value of a setting when a sub window for editing the value is open Controller a Cer See an R Foot ST SLOW fA a a Rec Play BE ES Switching files when th
211. ion at which the image is to be saved lt BMP Installer 8 Touch lt Load gt The following screen appears lt BMP Installer 03 FAMILY BMP _ 04 Friends BMP 05 Birthday BMP 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media Choose Ext Memory to load an image from USB memory or choose Disk to load an image from floppy disk The destination will show the names of the images saved on the external media 1 O Touch lt A gt lt J gt to select the image that you want to load into internal memory MEMO You can touch lt View gt to verify the image 1 1 Touch lt OK gt The image will be loaded If an image is already stored at the load destination the following screen will appear A Overwrite 0K To erase the currently loaded image and load the new image 1 Touch lt OK gt To cancel image loading 1 Touch lt Cancel gt NOTE If the image cannot be loaded the following screen will appear sBulles 194 0 SNOEN 221 Various Other Settings Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Inthe System screen touch lt Utility gt J 130 M 1 J Sound KBD Rec Play Registration The BMP Installer screen appears BMP Installer a i i 03 Blank e necrty Exit 4 Inthe screen touch lt 01 gt lt 03 gt to select the imag
212. k Light constantly While you are re recording When recording has ended for the specified area and the data is once again playing back the Rec button s indicator will resume flashing 1 3 Touch lt Stop gt to stop the recording The indicator of the track button which recorded the performance will light EA Recording Playing Back What You Play Recording and Layering Drum Parts Loop Recording You can repeatedly record over a specified region of the Rhythm part adding additional notes at each pass This type of recording is called Loop Recording This recording method is convenient when you wish to layer drum sounds individually for the Rhythm part Loop Recording can be used only when recording the 5 Rhythm part Press the Drums SFX button or the Manual Percussion button to select a Drum Set or Sound Effect Set p 66 p 69 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Touch lt Bwd gt and lt Fwd gt on the Rec Play screen move to the measure where you wish to start Loop Recording gt Utility The Utility screen appears Touch lt oO PECA M 1 J Sound KBD 2 Rec Play Q Registration Touch lt Loop Rec gt The Loop Rec screen appears Loop Rec 6 Touch the For value the number of measures that will be recorded repeatedly J 130 Loop Rec N E
213. l devices for each keyboard Upper Lower and Pedal you can specify the channel on which your playing will be transmitted as MIDI messages MEMO For details refer to Connecting MIDI Devices p 231 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears x System Master Tune Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode Tx MIDI Ch Upper X System Tx MIDI Ch Lower Tx MIDI Ch Pedal Tx MIDI Ch Solo Tx MIDI Ch Drums X System Tx MIDI Ch M Perc Tx MIDI Ch Ctrl Main Bouncing Ball Main Background Cea ui 2 Touch the part to change the MIDI Transmit Channel Menu Part Tx MIDI Ch Upper Upper Tx MIDI Ch Lower Lower Tx MIDI Ch Pedal Pedal Tx MIDI Ch Solo Solo Tx MIDI Ch Drums Tx MIDI Ch M Perc Tx MIDI Ch Ctrl Control Drums SFX Manual Percussion The Control part transmits Expression pedal data and PC numbers 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting System Tx MIDI Ch _ nwer 1 16 4 Touch lt Exit gt MIDI messages for the Solo part will be transmitted only when the Solo To Lower button is ON 213 sBulles 194 0 SNOEN Various Other Settings Eliminating the Bouncing Ball from the Main Screen You can set the main screen so that the bouncing ball does not appear 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Main Bouncing Ball X
214. led Punch in Recording To Specify the Segment to be Recorded Over Again 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Punch In Out gt The Punch In Out screen appears Punch In 4 Touch the From value the measure at which recording will begin Punch In 5mp 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to specify From the measure at which recording will begin 174 6 Touch lt Exit gt o Touch the For value the number of measures that will be re recorded 8 Touch lt gt lt gt to set For the number of measures that will be re recorded Q Touch lt Exit gt 10 Touch lt Rec gt The Rec Play screen appears and the unit is placed in recording standby To Record While Listening to the Song 1 1 Press the Track button which you wish to re record indicator flashes 1 2 Touch lt Play gt to begin recording When you touch lt Play gt the metronome will play two measures bars of count in before recording begins When you reach the first measure of the specified area recording will begin When the specified area ends recording will end and playback will resume While the song is playing back or recording the Rec button s indicator will be lit as follows Rec button s indicator Description Flash While the performance is playing bac
215. m 16 different Drum Sets and one set of Sound Effects as follows Drums SFX Set POP ROCK JAZZ BRUSH VOX DRUM STANDARD STANDARD2 ROOM ROOM2 POWER ELECTRONIC TR 808 DANCE JAZZ BRUSH BRUSH2 ORCHESTRA SOUND EFFECTS Press the Drums SFX button once again The Drums SFX button indicator will change from blinking to lit and your choice of drum set will be finalized Selecting and Playing Sounds MEMO For the types of drum set and the sound effects played by each key refer to Drum SFX Set List Appendix separate booklet After the Drums SFX drums sound effects screen is displayed it will close automatically after several seconds unless you touch the screen to select a drums sound effects set If you wish to switch drums sound effect sets quickly select the desired drums sound effect set while the Drums SFX drums sound effects screen is displayed MEMO You can also confirm the Drums SFX set by touching lt Exit gt in the Drums SFX screen You can also play the lower manual to confirm the drum set 67 spunos 6bulAe g pue Buljoajeas s MMMM Selecting and Playing Sounds 2 o ns ai AAT NAMAAAALALNL DN Playing a Lower Voice with Percussion Instrument Sounds and a Voice Phrase Manual Percussion You can play various drum sounds and Sound Effects using the bottom 15 keys of the Lower keyboard This is convenient when you wish to play the Lower voice to
216. m floppy disk choose Disk 6 Touch lt H lt B to select the SMF music files that you wish to load into internal memory 172 7 Touch lt Load gt Song Select 01 ATELIER 01 02 ATELIER 02 __ 03 ATELIER 03 j lt ay 0 0 aa The selected performance data will be loaded into internal memory For track assignments of SMF format performance data loaded to the ATELIER refer to p 158 8 Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance 9 Touch lt Bwd gt and lt Fwd gt to move to the desired measure bar at which you wish to begin recording 10 in the Rec Play screen touch lt Rec gt to enter recording standby mode lt Play gt and unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light Also the panel Rec button indicator will light and the Play Stop button will blink Perris You can also enter recording standby mode by pressing the lmam Rec button 1 1 Touch the Track button which you wish to recording button flashes 1 2 in the Rec Play screen touch lt Play gt to begin recording As you record the music file that was loaded into the ATELIER will play back 13 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Stop gt to stop recording The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit scab You can also start and stop recording by pressing the
217. mance song 1 Touch lt OK gt If you wish to erase the performance song 1 Touch lt Cancel gt Save the song to USB memory or a floppy disk p 169 Silencing a Specific Track Track Mute When the Rec Play screen is displayed the track button will light to indicate a track in which a performance has been recorded By turning off these track buttons you can temporarily silence the sound This is referred to as Track Mute If you want to play back a song from USB memory connect your USB memory to the External Memory connector before you continue If you want to play back a song from floppy disk connect your floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert the floppy disk 1 Press the Song button The Song Select screen appears Song Select 2 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose Favorites if you want to play back a song from user memory choose Ext Memory if you want to play back a song from USB memory or choose Disk if you want to play back a song from floppy disk 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the song that you wish to play back 157 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike q4 bulpsooey Recording Playing Back What You Play ESTALIA NALAN AAN STIL 4 Touch lt Load gt to load the song The Rec Play screen appears ATELIER O1 Rec Play e a J JE a Solo
218. memo If you choose lt Copy All gt all the Rhythms stored in the currently selected folder of USB Touch User lt f gt lt to select the copy destination number memory or the floppy disk will be copied in a single Rhythm File Copy eae operation e 01 LooseBigBand 7 8 amp g Numbers for which a Rhythm name is shown already have a Rhythm saved to them Sita Using Rhythm Performance 9 Touch lt Execute gt The copying of the Rhythm to User memory begins When copying ends the in the screen will change to the Rhythm name that you copied Never remove the USB memory or turn off the power while the If you select a number in which a Rhythm is already saved a screen like the Rhythm data is being copied from USB memory into the ATELIER If you do so the Rhythm data will not be loaded into the ATELIER and malfunctions could result After returning the Rhythm stored in the user memory to the factory settings p 218 copy the Rhythm from USB memory once following will appear AN Overwrite Rhythm 0K more If you want to delete the previously saved Rhythm and overwrite it with the Rhythm you re newly saving touch lt OK gt i If you don t want to delete the previously saved Rhythm touch lt Cancel gt then NEMP You can return only the user select a number at which no Rhythm has been saved and copy the Rhythm to P EN ony celings that num
219. more maximum of one octave l responsive 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The sensitivity of the D Beam controller can vary depending on ite Seund Kevbeerd sacen Gener the brightness of the Dronen i l aCe not operate as you expect please readjust the sensitivity 2 Touch lt Controller gt 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Controller screen appears The Sound Keyboard screen appears 3 Touch lt A gt lt J gt to display the Pitch Bend 2 Touch lt Controller gt Range The Controller screen appears Controller Fa 3 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the D Beam Pitch Bend Range 1 Sensitivity 4 Sound KBD gt Scan Sersitvty o Controller Fee 4 Rec Play Pitch Bend Range CA Registration J Sou KBD D Beam Sensitivity e cA Registration vse Controller d 30 amp Pitch Bend Range ao J Sound KBD M zl ejanuae lisia J cA Registration Exit aad Pitch Bend Range hS und 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 1 12 semitone steps 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting 6 Touch lt Exit gt Setting Drums SFX is fixed at one octave range regardless of this Pie setting sBulles 194 0 SNOEN 6 Touch lt Exit gt r This setting remains stored in memory even while power is MEMO g y P lmm turned off 201 Various Other Settin
220. ms Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 100 108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem New Road Sumpantawongse Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 224 8821 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel 02 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BARBADOS A amp B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey St Michael Barbados TEL 246 430 1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin Colombia TEL 574 3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc Orionweg 30 Curacao Netherland Antilles TEL 305 5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Call
221. n inb You can also set the bass split point by playing the imam desired key of the lower keyboard Split Point 120 KAKANAN AAGAARD AARAA a Sound KBD The Sound Keyboard screen appears a Sound Keyboard 130 8 a BA Theater Ens SS E aea gt BrassSect Trumpet Lower Ipa g Lower Organ2 ES 4 Rec Play i l A Registration Pedal nanana Organ Bass 1 While touching the Bass Split Point value A1 C7 indication in the Split Point screen press the key in the Lower keyboard that you want to specify as the Bass Split Point The bass split point will be set 2 Touch lt Split Point gt The Split Point screen appears Split Point iol M TUITE ALE gt Z J Sound KBD 49 Rec Play Aano pueoghey 1 m07 y BuIsN 151 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Bass Voice Sees B o m os HO BS oms Pedal To Lower Button 152 By using the Pedal To Lower button you can sound the Pedal Bass voice by playing the root note see p 251 of a chord on the Lower keyboard in the area that is playing the Lower voice Level lia Srs C A _ _ Electric i Alternateg To Lower SINE Pedal Select a Pedal Bass voice p 49 Press the Pedal To Lower button indicator lights When you play a chord in the area of the Lower keyboard that sounds the
222. n performances you record Rhythms and SMF music files saved on USB memory can also be copied to user memory p 87 User memory is quite useful since anything you place there will be retained even while the power is turned off Reset User Memory 0K The following things are stored in User memory e Songs you ve registered in Favorites e Rhythms Registration set egisiration sets Touch lt Cancel gt to return to the System screen without resetting the user memory 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 4 Touch lt OK gt The user memory will be reset to the factory set state lt System 4 Never switch off the power while this operation is in Send PC Switch progress Bank MSB Bank LSB PC Number Executing To reset all settings other than User memory to their original 2 In the System screen touch lt Utility gt to open MEMO factory settings refer to p 219 If you want to reset all the Utility screen settings to their factory set state refer to p 24 g ry p 218 sive Various Other Stings The confirmation message appears on screen Restoring All Settings Other Than the User Memory to the Original Factory Settings A Panel Reset 0K You can restore all of the settings other than the User memory p 218 to their original factory settings This function is called Panel Reset 1 Touch lt System
223. n location musical genre etc You can call up Registrations created by top level organists and refer to them for hints on how to select and layer sounds when creating your own Registrations 1 Touch lt Quick Registration gt on the Main screen MEMO If another screen is open touch Transpose C lt Main gt to access the main screen StringOrchestra The Woodwinds Brass Ensemble Big Orchestra 2 Touch a button that shows a Quick Registration group Ss oes Ses Sos as rs Let EC 35 SUOI OUN JUSIUBAUOD Convenient Functions 36 American Jazz Big Band ff European UK Movie amp Show i Harmonic Bar Festival Favourite Song In the sub window touch a Quick Registration group name to select the desired Quick Registration group The sub window closes and the Quick Registration screen returns to the display Touch lt Upper gt lt Lower gt or lt Pedal gt switching the respective button s indicator on or off to select the keyboard to which the voice is to be assigned BA Quick Registration Jazz Big Band Jazz Quartet The Brass Oh George Fat Sound Breathy Sax Jazz Vocal String Bass Solo L Smok in z2 EEE a SSS ee SS SS ae Setting Keyboard for which you select a voice Upper Upper keyboard Lower Lower keyboard Pedal Pedalboard Touch lt lt to switch pages
224. n or air conditioner or a device that contains an electric motor Depending on how the other device is used power supply noise could cause this device to malfunction or produce noise If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet please connect this device via a power supply noise filter Before you make connections you must switch off the power on all devices to prevent malfunction and or speaker damage Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the Power switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first turn off the Power switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible Location If this device is placed near devices that contain large transformers such as power amps hum may be induced in this device If this occurs move this device farther away or change its orientation If this device is operated near a television or radio color distortion may be seen in the television screen or noise may be heard from the radio If this occurs move this device farther away Keep your cell phone powered off or at a sufficient distance from this device If a cell phone is nearby noise may be heard when a call is received or initiated or during conver
225. n use the external display to view a slide show suitable for the character of the song or play along using recommended tones VIMA TUNES Screen i ij MEMO In the System Utility screen touch lt VIMA TUNES gt to access the VIMA nl n 7 You can also access the VIMA TUNES screen shown below TUNES sereen How ihe Ree Play screen p 153 8 VIMA TUNES In the Mood Yideo n Mute the melody portion S S or reduce the volume Mute Guide i In SMF 2 Regsraton Vibraphone Oboe Oboe Tenor Sa Tenor Sax2 7 reste 7 D Sounds appropriate for the currently Change the key of the song that s playing playing VIMA TUNES song will be selected automatically VIMA TUNES VIMA TUNES is a Roland specification for music files that contains image and lyric data allowing you to enjoy songs with lyrics and images simultaneously When data bearing the VIMA TUNES logo is played back on a device that bears the same logo lyrics can be shown on the screen of a connected external display letting you enjoy karaoke or watch a slide show oapi pue sIsnyy BuiAoluy 233 Enjoying Music and Video Enjoying VIMA TUNES Songs Listening to a VIMA TUNES Song 234 You can connect a CD drive commercially available and play back VIMA MEMO TUNES sold separately While playing a VIMA TUNES song you can use If you want to use a CD or the the external display to view
226. n f r inte kasseras tillsammans med hush llsavfall T m merkint ilmaisee ett tuote on EU maissa ker tt v erill n kotitalousj tteist kunkin alueen voimassa olevien m r ysten mukaisesti T ll merkinn ll varustettuja tuotteita ei saa h vitt kotitalousj tteiden mukana Ez a szimb lum azt jelenti hogy az Eur pai Uni ban ezt a term ket a h ztart si hullad kt6l elk l n tve az adott r gi ban rv nyes szab lyoz s szerint kell gy jteni Az ezzel a szimb lummal ell tott term keket nem szabad a h ztart si hullad k k z dobni Symbol oznacza e zgodnie z regulacjami w odpowiednim regionie w krajach UE produktu nie nale y wyrzuca z odpadami domowymi Produkt w opatrzonych tym symbolem nie mo na utylizowa razem z odpadami domowymi Tento symbol ud v e v zem ch EU mus b t tento v robek sb r n odd len od dom c ho odpadu jak je ur eno pro ka d region V robky nesouc tento symbol se nesm vyhazovat spolu s dom c m odpadem Tento symbol vyjadruje e v krajin ch E sa mus zber tohto produktu vykon va oddelene od domov ho odpadu pod a nariaden platn ch v konkr tnej krajine Produkty s t mto symbolom sa nesm vyhadzova spolu s domov m odpadom See s mbol n itab et EL i maades tuleb see toode olempr gist eraldi koguda nii nagu on igas piirkonnas m ratletud Selle s mboliga m rgitud tooteid ei tohi ra visata koos olmepr giga i
227. n is pressed The unit switches to record standby mode In record standby the Rec button is lit and the Play Stop button flashes The Song Select screen appears in the display The Registration Load screen appears in the display The Demo screen opens Touching lt Rec Play gt in the Main Screen to Open the Rec Play Screen and Using the Rec Play Screen s Composer Buttons Rec Play NEW SONG Pee Track lee fs Gi Jo Button Track Rhythm Accomp Bass Lower Upper Solo Control Reset Bwd Fwd sn Vima TUNES Description Buttons for tracks to which performances are recorded light up A lighted button can be toggled between lighted and unlit by pressing it Tracks are muted when the button s light is off gt For more about the track buttons refer to p 154 Returns you to the beginning of the song Stops playback of the song Starts playback of the song After lt Rec gt has been touched to put the composer in record standby mode recording then starts when you touch lt Play gt The unit switches to record standby mode In record standby lt Rec gt is lit and lt Play gt flashes Rewinds the song Fast forwards the song You can toggle between display of the track buttons the bouncing ball or the track mute buttons by touching the button The Notation screen appears in the display The Utility screen for the Composer is displayed
228. ncetfalesen da cilainn diate uatetiaae 205 AUTE GB Semen enn ete ee R 239 Auto Standard Tempo sG 02 ce sees 203 Automatic Accompaniment 0cceeeeee 78 251 B Basie COI aae teann ra teenies 251 Basso eee eee ae nee Sem E 149 Bender Vibrato xe issecnccsceccosaseedaasevnerminerareeavoes 200 BMP Installer enai aa A 220 Bouncing Ball ssri ahd ER 29 BrEOK are ee a E T area 121 Brightness Rotary Etech ercon iae ant len es taeas 130 BIN GING O orao e EE 118 C Calibration TOUM SGreei e 217 CODA eTe EA E 239 CORE PEA NEEE TE E 251 Chord Fold sernai ES 202 Chord Intelligence srmsreiseiisre ino 80 Chord Name Main SCreen tx e05 oci csciactedeceaistite REEE 29 CHOTIS sca soor bapi aer aaa 251 Choros EMmeCh ita calc n N 131 code NOOK osram O 24 CONPOSET serito i S Los COMPIE ea Saas aus ete ree eae 229 Connecting Audio Equipment fa Ascnsseetons cus new tasaiancatoete 228 COMPIE ern ENE 229 Copying MEG UTE rrasa prianie oA RSA 184 Performance Song cccesssssieeeeesssireressrrrreeess 177 Registaho nesmen y 114 116 RAVIN ieten 87 89 Rhythms on Disks into User Memory 87 177 Cornrech TINING seraa re EEN 185 Coun DOWN sereen E 78 Count Down Sound co c622 asechnsatsssuniaauseheimecessionh 202 COURIR tereea tenes 164 Count In Recording sc wicescriernaeanidseapesnsceseadncnae 176 260 D D Beam Controlle ekcctens testator kant sae 141 D Beam Controller sensitivity ccccceeeeeeees 201 Dampe
229. ng Sounds 13 Touch lt gt lt I gt io select the sound you want to move 14 Touch the Meas Beat Tick setting The note location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat uo ZJ Note Edit hort Guiro m Close HH 1 5 Touch lt 30 gt lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 30 gt to move the sound With the Rhythm Customize function note locations are expressed in terms of Measure Beat Tick One tick is the smallest unit used in indicating the location of the note and there are 120 ticks in a quarter note Typical notes might be indicated as shown below Quarter Note 8th Note S S d slide 1 i 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 1 0 1 1 60 1 2 0 1 2 60 1 measure a beat 0 tick 8th Note Triplet 16th Note Ti AG 1 1 0 1 1 40 1 1 80 1 1 0 1 1 30 1 1 60 1 1 90 The ticks for each note have the following characteristics NOTE TICKS O Every 120 ticks O 60 Every 60 ticks O 40 80 Every 40 ticks 0 30 60 90 Every 30 ticks Quarter Note 8th Note 8th Note Triplet 16the Note sua Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Changing and Deleting the Instruments Used You can change an instrument used in a Rhythm and replace it with another instrument 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 2 Touch the section in the Rhythm Customize screen where the instrument names are displayed Rhythm
230. ng type plug A polarized plug has two blades with 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does replacement of the obsolete outlet not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for
231. njoyment is a violation of applicable laws No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI Out connector Profile Akio Sasaki After graduating from the Berklee College of Music in Boston as a principle Akio has been active as a top jazz organ player in Japan He performs live throughout the country and also teaches at the Senzoku Gakuen College of Music and at the Kyoto Musical Academy Additionally he has published numerous arrangements works of music theory and music education books In 2005 he released his own trio s CD album Glide in Blue receiving high praise not only from organ fans but also from many jazz fans In 2007 he released his new album Fly by Night and his musical career continues to expand Hector Olivera Hector Olivera was born in Argentina He received his education at the Conservatory and the University of Buenos Aires followed by a scholarship at the famous Juilliard School of Music in New York Olivera has performed extensively throughout the world including concerts at prestigious places such as the Notre Dame Cathedral in Paris and Carnegie Hall in New York Hector Olivera s expertise involves both the traditional pipe organ and the electronic organ Presently Olivera tours internationally playing some of the world s most magnificent pipe organs as well as his preferred electronic organ the Roland ATELIER for which he continues to collaborate with its development 255 Demo Song
232. nner the Rhythm performance data is grouped to Rhythm You can mute only a portion of the Rhythms or accompaniment on the Track Mute screen 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play ATELIER O1 i m code jE Solo 2 Touch lt gt a number of times The Track Mute screen appears Sixteen Track Mute buttons appear in the display From the left these are Track 1 Track 2 Track 15 and Track 16 Rec Play ATELIER 01 a rack Mute peel Solo aoooaaa fol felfielfm fe Sagas 3 Touch the screen to select the track that you wish to mute Rec Play ATELIER O1 a Mute le 5 AGa CCLC The button you ve touched goes out nne ie sound is muted 4 When you touch an unlit track button the track button lights up indicating muting of the track is cancelled 5 Touch lt Exit gt Track mute will be cancelled if you choose other performance data The seven Track buttons in the Rec Play screen p 154 correspond to the sixteen Track Mute buttons of the Track Mute screen as shown below Commercial SMF Music Files Track Mute Button 1 Solo 2 Pedal 3 Lower 4 Upper 5 9 11 16 Accmp 10 Rhythm Track Button Solo Pedal Lower Upper Accomp Rhythm Performance Data Created on the ATELIER Track Mute Button 1 Solo 2 Pedal 3 Lower 4 Upper 5 9 12 14 15 Accmp 10 Rhythm 11 Drums SFX
233. no Bunpa Editing Your Musical Performance Data qua 4 Touch lt Quantize gt Edit Menu Delete Measure Erase Event Quantize The Quantize screen appears Quantize 5 Touch the Track value the track that will be quantized 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to specify the Track the track that will be quantized Quantize Track ALL RHYTHM ACCOMP BASS LOWER UPPER SOLO If you select ALL the recording in all the tracks will be quantized 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 8 Touch the From value the measure at which quantization will begin 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to set From the measure at which quantization will begin 186 10 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 1 Touch the For value the number of measures that will be quantized 1 2 Touch lt gt lt gt to set For the number of measures that will be quantized To specify everything through to the last measure set for ALL 13 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 4 Touch the Resolution value the resolution at which notes will be aligned 15 Touch the screen to set Resolution the resolution at which notes will be aligned The Resolution the timing to which notes are aligned can be set to one of the following settin
234. nt to create a folder user memory 4 Touch lt Create gt A screen will appear allowing you to specify a name for the new folder _ Eza EA J Sound KBD 4 Rec Play cA Registration NOTE E Only lowercase letters and the _ underscore character can be E used in a folder name 9 Assign a name to the folder Touch the screen to specify the desired characters You can t create a folder that Rename the folder as described in Assigning a Name to a Registration Set has the same name as an po 101 already existing folder 6 When you ve finished touch lt OK gt A new folder with the name you assigned will be created Creating a folder in the Rec Play record playback screen Here s how to create a folder in the Rec Play record playback screen 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Song Select gt The Song Select screen appears 4 Touch lt File Edit gt The Song File Edit screen appears 5 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media Choose Favorites if you want to create a folder in Favorites or Ext Memory if you want to create a folder in USB memory 6 Carry out steps 4 through 6 of Creating a Folder p 45 45 suonouny JUBIUBAUOD Selecting and Playing Sounds Selectin
235. o songs by pressing the panel Play Stop button 3 Touch lt to start playback of the demo song When the selected demo song ends the next demo song will begin playing 33 ETAN Convenient Functions 4 Touch lt once again to stop playback of the demo song 5 Press the Demo button to exit the demonstration screen If the following screen appears _ If the performance song in the unit has not been saved to the Favorites User memory or USB memory the following message appears and it will not be possible to play the Demo songs MEMO The performance data can be saved on the Favorites User A Clear Song OK memory or USB memory If you wish to save the performance data to the Favorites or USB memory refer to Saving Performance Songs p 169 If you do not want to delete the performance data touch lt Cancel gt All rights reserved If you want to delete the performance data touch lt OK gt Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws The data for the Demo song that is being played is not available at the MIDI Out connector 34 See UU Convenient Functions LIMA Choose a Keyword for Quick Registration Selection You can select a voice appropriate for your performance by selecting from keywords representing your situatio
236. o Std Tempo Auto Standard Tempo 4 re lt 0 lt B to display the Rhythm Mode Rhythm Options Rhythm Options Auto Std Tempo Rhythm Mode Auto Std Tempo Rhythm Mode 9 Touch the Auto Std Tempo setting to switch between ON and OFF 9 Touch the Rhythm Mode setting to switch Each time you touch the Auto Std Tempo setting it will between ORIGINAL and S SERIES alternate between ON and OFF Each time you touch the Rhythm Mode setting it will alternate between ORIGINAL and S SERIES Setting Description Swiichinetihe Rhim whilethe Rhyne zemny Dercnpnon ON stopped automatically changes the tempo ORIGINAL The function of the Fill In Auto button and Fill settings to those in the new Rhythm In Break button will not change OFF The tempo settings are not changed The function of the Fill In Auto button and Fill automatically when the Rhythms are changed In Break button will change 6 Touch Exits S SERIES Fill In Auto button gt Fill In To Variation button ca This setting remains stored in memory even while power is Fill In Break button 3 lmm turned off Fill In To Original button 6 Touch lt Exit gt sBules 194 0 Ssnoue MEMO This setting remains stored in memory even while power is lant turned off 203 Various Other Settings Placing the Panel Overlay Sheet If you ve set Rhythm Mode to S SERIES you c
237. o stop the song You can also play back or stop the music files by touching 2 gt p gt to play back the ma lt Play gt or lt Stop gt in the Rec Play screen By touching M EMO lt Bwd gt or lt Fwd gt you can rewind or fast forward the performance Recording Playing Back What You Play Playing Back All Performance Data M EE EE EE EE EE EE EE E EE E E E e O O o O e e e O e e e e O E e e ee 8 8 1 Prepare the song that you want to play back If you want to play a song from USB memory connect it to the External Memory connector If you want to play a song from floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext Drive connector and insert a floppy disk into the drive 2 While holding down the Song button press the Play Stop button Composer Song Registration FV CE G All performance data saved on the USB memory or floppy disk will be played consecutively 3 To stop playback press the Play Stop button Composer Song Registration 5 EE Rese Play Stop Rec If Internal Memory Contains Performance Data that has not been Saved EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE E E E E o O e e e o e e O e e O E E e E E If internal memory contains performance data that has not been saved to USB memory or the Favorites user memory the message The song will be erased OK will appear If you wish to erase the perfor
238. o the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the Do not use this apparatus near water manufacturer Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in or table specified by the manufacturer or accordance with the manufacturers instructions sold with the apparatus When a cart is used e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators use caution when moving the cart apparatus heat registers stoves or other apparatus including combination to avoid injury from tip over a amplifiers that produce heat 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or unused for long periods of time groundi
239. of the song touch lt Bwd gt lt Fwd gt to move to the measure from which you wish to begin playback 3 Touch lt Play gt to begin playback After playback reaches the end of the performance it will stop automatically m You con also begin playback by pressing the Composer MEMP Play Stop button A 16 4 To stop playback at any point touch lt Stop gt You can also stop playback by pressing the Composer MEMD Play Stop button The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of MEMO the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal p 121 You can specify whether or not the Expression Pedal will MEMO affect the playback and what you play while ATELIER music file is being played back p 200 If you load performance data such as SMF music files that was not designed for an ATELIER Series instrument and play it back you may find when playing Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniment that the music doesn t sound quite like it should For example the wrong sounds could be played If you want the data to be played back accurately first press the Reset button prior to playback Add a Count Sound to Match the Timing Count In In cases such as when you want to perform in time with a song you can have a count sound played before playback of the song begins allowing you to synchronize your own performance with the song Playing back a song after playing the count
240. oice pedal bass voice percussion etc to be played independently for an even wider range of performance possibilities Since the lower keyboard can be divided into a maximum of four parts you have at your command expressive power that rivals that of a three manual organ In addition you can use the Drums SFX function to play drum sounds or sound effects from the entire lower keyboard Large wide LCD For convenience the frame area of the wide LCD screen always displays buttons for frequently used functions You can also view the tempo and measure number in any screen The color liquid crystal touch panel ensures excellent visibility and easy operability Main Features Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler more concise instructions e The AT 500 is abbreviated in this manual as ATELIER respectively e Button names are enclosed in square brackets as in Drums SFX button e On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets lt gt as in lt Exit gt o A V lt gt means that you should press one or the other button Example Reverb A V buttons Tempo lt gt buttons e For easier readability some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors e The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching e An asterisk or a at the beginning of a paragra
241. oint Send PC Switch Song Edit a aa The setting screen for the specified keyword appears 9 Make settings in the setting screen that appeared 6 Touch lt Exit gt Convenient Functions 43 SUOI OUN JUSIUBAUOD EL 0 Convenient Functions Creating a Folder You can create folders in a connected USB memory device or in user memory Favorites You can t create a folder on a floppy disk If you want to create a folder in USB memory connect the USB memory to the external memory connector About folders The ATELIER lets you create up to 99 Registration sets or songs If you create a folder you ll be able to save up to 99 Registration sets or songs in each folder You can create as many folders as you wish limited only by the capacity of the media It s a good idea to save the Registrations in a folder for each song 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen The Registration Load screen appears MA Registration Load L 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 02 REGIST 02 2 Touch lt file gt The Registration File Edit screen appears 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 O5 REGIST 05 44 gt v lt UMUC NUTT Convenient Functions IAAL 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media Choose Ext Memory if you want to create a folder on USB memory or User if you wa
242. oklet MEMO You can change the settings so that both the Pitch Bend and Vibrato effects are applied to the Lower keyboard voice or the voices on the Pedalboard Please refer to Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply p 200 119 SUOI OUN BOURBWJOL8d 34 HuIsN Using the Performance Functions Using the Foot Switches On either side of the expression pedal are two Foot Switches Different functions are assigned to each of these two foot switches You can also change the functions assigned to the left and right Foot Switches Please refer to Changing the Function of the Foot Switch p 121 With the factory settings the following functions are assigned to the left and right Foot Switches Right Foot Switch Left Foot Switch Switch the Rotary effect between Fast Slow If Rotary is turned on the Rotary effect will switch between Fast and Slow each time you press the Foot Switch Glide an effect by which the pitch is lowered by a semitone while the foot switch is pressed and is returned to what is originally was when you release your foot While you are pressing the Foot Switch the pitch will be temporarily lowered When you release the Foot Switch the pitch will return to normal gradually You can store functions to be assigned to the foot switch to individual Registration buttons p 97 120 If Registration Shift is turned RIGHT
243. old Leading Bass Auto Standard Tempo Rhythm Mode Music Assistant 250 titles x 4 variations One Touch Program 195 Rhythms x 2 groups x 4 variations Quick Registration 150 settings in 12 groups Drums SFX Sets 16 Drum Sets 1 SFX Set Manual Percussion Sets 6 sets Harmony Intelligence 18 types Master Tuning 415 3 Hz 466 2 Hz 0 1 Hz steps Key Transpose 4 7 in semitones Playback Transpose 6 5 in semitones Effects Rotary Sound Chorus RSS Reverb Sustain Vibrato Pitch Bend Glide Registration 8 memories Registration Function Load Next File Edit 258 Composer Score Display File Storage Rated Power Output Speaker Display Pedals Switches Connectors Power Supply Power Consumption Finish Dimensions Weight Accessories Options Main Specifications Tracks 7 tracks Note Storage Approx 40 000 notes gt Oo O 5 Q O D o Max 999 measures 20 500 Song Length Tempo Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note Realtime Replace Punch In Out Loop SUOI EdIIN9dS uen Recording Edit Function Delete Measure Delete Track Erase Copy Quantize DigiScore Expanded Display Lyrics Display Change of Part Displayed Note Name Display Change Clef USB memory mecca floppy disk in the case of using optional USB floppy disk drive FD 01A MUSIC ATELIER original format SMF format O Save Format Songs Max 99 songs for each folder 50 W 50 W Graphic 8
244. ong Select screen appears Lower Display the Lower part notation Upper Display the Upper part notation Song Select Display the Upper part and Lower part U amp notations 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELCIER 03 You can change the part that is displayed and O4 ATELIER O4 ption ah p way in which the notation is eS 7 161 05 ATELIER O5 ES isplayed p DETE GEL LI 3 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to view the notation for a song in user memory select Favorites If you want to view the notation for a song in USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to view the notation for a song in floppy disk select Disk 4 Touch lt P gt lt E to select the song whose notation is to be displayed 9 Touch lt Load gt After the song is loaded the Rec Play screen appears 160 statin Recording Playing Back What You Play 4 Touch the value setting button for the item Changing the Notation Settings whose setting you want to change 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main Screen Menu Setting RTE The Rec Play screen appears 7 ji OFF Not displayed Rec Play Fur Elise oe Letter names fixed do are C D E display in the detailed m E par Pitches notation o fu oe Jih l Solmization syllables movable v Do Re Mi do are displayed in the Display is switched ae ol ao Pea Clef Upper G Clef Displayed the G clef s
245. onome countin lam before recording starts p 207 Caution If you press the Rec button when a song has been selected from the USB memory or floppy disk the selected song will be completely loaded into the ATELIER and the Composer will enter into the recording standby mode To record a new song use the following procedure 1 Press the Rec button to cancel recording standby 2 Disconnect the external media If you ve connected USB memory disconnect the USB memory from the external memory connector If you re using a floppy disk remove the floppy disk from the disk drive 3 Delete the performance data p 167 Re record your performance Composer Song Registration S5 EE ES Reset Play Sto Rec a ee ed la gt E If the following screen appears When recording was automatically canceled because the memory limit was reached 163 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike 4 6ulpsooey Recording Playing Back What You Play Tees UREN Playing Back a Performance Song Here s how to play back a performance you ve recorded Composer Song Registration 5 EE Rese Play Stop Rec MENU B peme Rec Play ATELIER 01 ee Track 5 sounareo ao m Ea Solo elds a 2 Touch lt Reset gt The location at which playback will start will return to the beginning of measure 1 If you wish to begin playback from the middle
246. ontrol x All Notes OFF O 123 125 7 8 9 Active Sense O Reset x NO NNNN NNNNNN CO CO oo 00 CO CO CO OO NN WWKRWWNHN DPD Control Change O00 oOoCoooooooo0oo0oo00000000000000 i Message O x is selectable 7 Received in GM2 mode O x is selectable by SysEx GS Part 8 Received in GS mode Not received in the keyboard part 9 Received in General MIDI mode Can be received in the keyboard part 10 Recognize as M 1 even if M41 With MIDI IN Mode 2 11 V LINK With MIDI IN Mode 1 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No Demo Song List Song Title Copyright Jazz Organ 2007 Roland Corporation Donau Wellen 2007 Roland Corporation Greensleeves 2004 Roland Corporation Pop Organ 2004 Roland Corporation Jazz Combo 2003 Roland Corporation Slow Waltz 2003 Roland Corporation Hawaiian 2003 Roland Corporation Dixieland 2003 Roland Corporation Soft Gospel 2001 Roland Corporation Pipe Organ 1999 Roland Corporation Orchestra 2001 Roland Corporation Soprano 2001 Roland Corporation Tenor 1999 Roland Corporation Jazz Scat 1999 Roland Corporation All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal gt Oo 5 O D o SI Buos oweq e
247. ored In the Individual Registration BUttons cccsseeeeeeeeeee eee 253 NAIDU iin See MNO ANGI cocina cette ich heres tue dah E cash a a ES ERA 254 SIO SOM Skoro e E E A ooeteea waned EO 255 SOM OT US Feesn n EAR A seneneeaeneaevauesie 257 Maim SIE Cin CCNONS creses E EN 258 1e E eat cB E E EA E A E AE E E EE EAT T 260 16 MEMO 2 3 4 5 6 18 Panel Descriptions Part Balance Big Band Country Oldies Swi Gospel Contempo Ballad World It ad EO a G a ercussion Waltz Trad atin March Showtime Acoustic Manual p A tandari B Part Balance A V buttons gt p 62 Pedal Bass Voice select buttons gt p 49 Alternate button To Lower button gt p 152 Level A V buttons gt p 62 Lower Voice select buttons gt p 48 Lower Organ Part Lower Orchestral Part Alternate button Level A V buttons gt p 62 Touch Screen gt p 29 Harmony Intelligence button gt p 125 Upper Voice select buttons gt p 48 Upper Organ Part Upper Orchestral Part Alternate button Level A V buttons gt p 62 Variation 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Vintage Organ Percussion Solo Voice select buttons gt p 50 Solo Part Alternate button To Lower button gt p 146 Level A V buttons gt p 62 Power On switch gt p 22 D Beam gt p 141 p 142 D Beam buttons gt p 141 p 142 Up
248. ot a malfunction when the ambient temperature is below freezing Bulooyusejqnol Nothing appears on screen This is due to the nature of a liquid crystal display and is not a This is not a malfunction malfunction lt appears as though there are vertical stripes in the screen If the Video Monitor button is lit the ATELIER s display will show the same Can t view the main screen The Video Monitor button is lit image as the device connected to the p 237 ATELIER Press the Video Monitor button so it s turned off Bouncing Ball is not shown The Bouncing Ball display is turned off Turn the Main Bouncing Ball setting ON p 214 With some music files the lyrics cannot hae This is not a malfunction be displayed correctly In the Notation screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges This is not a malfunction Lyrics are not indicated properly of the screen and not be displayed in the display A button was pressed while the lyrics were being shown in the display Ifyou want to have the lyrics be displayed During the display of lyrics you could again touch lt Play gt on the Rec Play p 206 be taken to a different screen if you screen press a button In the Notation screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges This is not a malfunction of the screen and not be displayed The Notation display feature is Notation is not indicated properly pa
249. other For instance you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument What s MIDI MIDI short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface was developed as a standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers The ATELIER is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange performance data with external devices These connectors can be used to connect the ATELIER to an external device for even greater versatility About MIDI Connectors The ATELIER has two kinds of MIDI connectors Connecting these to the MIDI connectors on a MIDI instrument makes it possible for the two instruments to control each other For instance you can output sound from the other instrument or switch tones on the other instrument You should also set the MIDI send channel as needed MIDI MIDI Out Connector Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector with an optional MIDI cable The notes played on the keyboard movements of the Damper pedal Expression data data indicating that a Registration button etc was pressed will be transmitted to the external MIDI connector The Solo voice will be transmitted only if the Solo To Lower button is ON MIDI In Connector Connect the external MIDI device to the MIDI out connector with an optional MIDI cable Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here These incoming messages may instruct
250. ou can copy Registration from user memory to USB memory In this case touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Registration File Copy screen in step 4 of the above procedure so the arrow points upwards In this state you ll be copying Registration from user memory to USB memory BA Registration File Copy O1 REGIST O1 we The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying Registration from USB memory to user memory Using the Performance Functions Transposing to a Different Key Key Transpose You can transpose the key of a performance without having to shift the position of your fingers on the keyboard This feature is called Key Transpose For example even if the song is in a difficult key with numerous sharps or flats you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to play Transpose Z Z Set the value for the transposition with the Transpose and buttons Each time you press a Transpose button the pitch will be transposed by a semitone Acceptable values range from A to G in semitone steps The specified value will be displayed in the Main screen 4 Sound KBD ESE Enn n 4 Rec Play S EE EE SS _ _ _ _ _ _ y QA Registration E z Rhythm MESS CuM ELTELTE State of the Transpose buttons If transposed non C One of the Transpose button indicators is lit The Tran
251. ou wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the disk Write l can write new data onto disk D Protect prevents writing to disk Write Protect Tab e The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk e Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them and to protect them from dust dirt and other hazards By using a dirty or dustridden disk you risk damaging the disk as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction USB Memory Handling e When connecting USB memory firmly insert it all the way in e Do not touch the pins of the USB memory connector or allow them to become dirty e USB memory is made using high precision electronic components so please observe the following points when poate To prevent damage from static electrical charges discharge any static electricity that might be present in your body before handling USB memory e Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal object e Do not bend or drop USB memory or subject it to strong impact e Do not leave USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations such as a closed up automobile Storage temperature 0 50 degrees C e Do not allow USB memory to become wet e Do not disassemble or modify USB memory Important Notes When connecting USB memory position it horizontally with the external memory
252. ounded correctly This is not a malfunction 245 gt Oo 5 Q O D o Bulooysejqno Troubleshooting Song does not Play Correctly Problem The volume changes during playback of performance data Certain instrument are not heard while playing a song When recording is performed repeatedly while changing the Part If you wish to get rid of the volume Balance volume the previously changes use the Erase function to delete p 182 recorded Part Balance data remains in the Part Balance data the Control track p 157 The track is muted Turn off track muting p 159 Recording is not Possible Problem Recording is not possible If you wish to erase a previously recorded track and then re record The recorded performance has disappeared Press the track button for the desired Press the track button for the desired track track to make that button blink before to make that button indicator blink before p 166 you begin recording you begin recording On Rec Play screen touch the track Touch the track button for the track you button for the desired track to make that ae 9 e ODE E Screen button indicator blink before you begin pilo stopping the button from flashing recording It is not possible to recover performance Any performance that has been data that has been lost recorded is deleted when the power to Before you turn off the power save the p 169 the
253. per Harmonic Bars gt p 53 Solo Harmonic Bars gt p 53 p 62 Vintage Organ buttons gt p 53 Percussion buttons gt p 56 H Bar Manual button gt p 57 Video Monitor button gt p 237 Value dial gt p 32 Pedal Harmonic Bars gt p 53 Lower Harmonic Bars gt p 53 Transpose buttons gt p 117 Panel Descriptions suonduos q jeued 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 iiia E 21 Composer gt p 153 25 Pedal Sustain button gt p 133 Song lel 26 Master Volume slider gt p 22 Registration button gt p 99 p 114 Demo button gt OF 33 27 Brilliance slider md p 18 Reset button 28 Pitch Bender Vibrato lever gt p 119 Play Stop button Reci burons pr 163 29 Rotary Sound gt p 128 On Off button 22 Drums SFX button gt p 66 Fast Slow button 23 Manual Percussion button gt p 68 30 Registration buttons 24 Rhythm select buttons gt p 71 Write button gt p 97 Tempo lt q p gt buttons gt p 77 Manual button gt p 100 Fill In Auto button gt p 79 Registration 1 8 buttons gt p 96 Fill In Break button gt p 79 Variation buttons gt p 79 Intro Ending button gt p 75 p 77 Count Down button gt p 78 Arranger On Off button gt p 78 One Touch Program button gt p 84 Sync Start button gt p 76 Start Stop button gt p 75 p 77 19 Before You Start Playing
254. ph indicates a note or precaution These should not be ignored e p refers to pages within the manual 10 Contents USING THE UNIT SAFELY osceccscesccccrtevccvesiescaupste se eientiatseestieneceeea SO Important NOTES esiseinas save ccectece E E EE O Main FECHUIES cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 8 Conventions Used in This Manual cccccccceccecececececcceccucucucuceceueesucscusaceceusecusacans 10 Panel DESChIPHONS ocrssssorecoscsevenssarcassaesevesceaeeuanedecessesaneensiasecsoeessacevexvtces VO Before You Start Playing scseiscsseecsscsesvsccessesecesswsnetussdeseteecidesvesucscsesvsiecsee 20 seing US The MUSIC RES ecu ts tac 2 he nne i E TE E E acai 20 Connecting Ihe Speaker Cable rjc sc Lenses Ea E a TETEE O ETTE EE 20 Opening C losmng me Hdikearsanr r a a eane ere een ae 21 Connecting the Power Cordunieer ani aa Italien dee cotalanan eens etait eadtiaadt oe hteeweed 21 Turning Ane Power Min OM ees na ttie tau I N E OT 22 Turning Onhe POWER 34 2 erase e E T E RA 22 Tomna OMNE OWE ean a secant net ae E teeateeota 22 Gmo Tedanhone Saee E E OAR 23 Using a VIGOR NON S ereas aee E E N E EE EE 23 Using aihe OCS ROOK ursis oeer eE E E E e E E EE 24 Restoring All the Factory Default Settings ccccccccccccccee eee eecceeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseuaane sees 24 Using the External MEMON ys tsadscnat naan A A adanemiadauemancomeuaeuede 26 Connecting th
255. r 52 teccecceoveeveceseuieiwess hea byee steerer eeatannaee tenner 220 Displaying a Graphic at PowerUp sc asecscneaveaianestabeiesunautaneadaataaitanasaucmeea iaia esarete 220 Deleting an Image Stored in Internal Memory sesssnnesssssnsssssinrsssrrirsssrrressrriresssreens 222 Copying Data from a Floppy Disk to USB Memory ccccceeccccccce esse eeeeeeeeessaeeeseeeeesaaene sees 223 Videorelated Seling srein a nenna n sie ont E eae een eee E 224 Selecting the Type of Slide Show cccccccccceeseecccccec eee eeeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneas 224 Selecting the Interval at which Images will Change cccccccceseeecceesseeeeeeeseeeeeees 225 15 Contents Connecting with External Device sssssccccsssssssscccssssssscccssssssseeeees 227 Name and Functions of Jack and Connectors taasci0s5 ata eh eins eeenales ce haatic acai ve itieot crank 227 Conmecting to AvGiO Roui pment stats a nci6 8s beaten eed tet ete alguna daa ae Lee 228 Connecting d GOMPUIE rnane a aE E A E E AA 229 Making the Settings for the USB Driver cccccccccesseeccecceeesseeeeeeceeesseeeeeeeeeeeaaneees 230 Connecino fia A Bi BI ol fermen Rene Cte cor etic reteset ee ee PE es te eee ee E ees ee eee 231 Connecing an Exlernal DIS ONAN cca cct lear ala thence te eS acne one fare icane ES 232 Enjoying Music and Video ssssssscccsssssssscccsssssssececsssssssesesssssses LOO Enjoying VIMA TUNES
256. r lt R Series gt Settings Description Save formats that can be used with the AT 900 AT 900C AT 800 AT 500 AT 300 AT 100 and AT 75 when saved in this format the Original data can also be used by AT SL Series AT 45 AT 15 and AT S Series devices R Series Save formats that can be used with AT R Series devices Touch lt OK gt Saving of the Registration data will begin n When saving ends the in the screen will change to the Registration name that you saved If you ve named the Registration it will be saved with that name suai Using the Registration Butons If the following screen appears If you select a number at which a Registration has already been saved and touch lt Save gt the following screen appears A Overwrite Registration 0K If you wish to update the contents of the Registration data 1 Touch lt OK gt If you wish to save new data instead of updating the Registration l Touch lt Cancel gt Rewriting of the Registration will be canceled 2 In the Registration Save screen select the number that is displayed as a number that currently does not contain Registration data 3 Touch lt Save gt p 103 When saving is complete the saved Registration name will be displayed Saving Registrations in a folder e e e Oa 1 Carry out steps 1 through 4 of Saving Registration Sets p 103 MEM To create a folder refer to 2
257. r Pedal aracsenieesire n eccceseas 118 199 DECOY eniron r e akea 118 Delete GODRIC arini E nE E E tags atlecnes 222 NEOUS aana cya caeaeecoeeeier ans 179 Performance SONGS srreineiwiiiieiacsaedaenanegoens 172 Regi Nan ON Ss otic ha EEEN 110 Rhythms Stored in User Memory 0 0 0 0006 94 TGR EE E ESA E E ET 180 DEMO SONO onien a AEA A 33 DEMO SONG gi EEE TEE EE 255 Depth Expression Pedal esskccs cis cicedieds Geese etennunee 124 DISK OR YIM headin cata calenct meet lar aateh ue nekaeeniced kas 86 Drums SFX oo cc cccccecececsceccccecececeeeeeuceeecueesaeeneess 66 Drums Z SFA DCIS nearne e O AA 67 E PORNO cake heated ek eter adalah ada tnntn deem ceee 179 Performance Data ton intercowsaaaiccenseteitenestaue 179 EICO caeso Saale batt alee ale aan EN 125 PAGINO Suchcgotedi vale haldaatcheiiek E ANA 251 Erase Performance SONG wisczacsseiaedesacbawsendeeeseel 167 Erase Event sre e a case weceuee dans 182 EXO CUVEE E A ar 124 Exo ore Ur GY oaeen e E S 200 DE NGO Ee a E TTO N 199 Bxpression Pedal tnesncotets sadaaned unaia 123 FUNGON reana a oriaryrewamsat ioe tivesneiieoe 199 External Display CORMECHING airne NE 232 F FACIO RESE Forsan r ea E E OE cece 24 PGS EEEE EA AA A AAEE E T 54 Pe EAE enuan orien eee eet ee 44 112 114 Fill In PUNO caidaven urd a ainsi 79 Break att a idicaeebaer dee ee hace eal meeee x 79 POOR OWH geen ie thoes eet tes EAE 120 121 Forma ch cser satan etna dacteenda At 220 G General M
258. r sound Refer to Drum Set List for details on which drum sound or Sound Effect will be played by Pma each note SFX LZ 1 Press the Drums SFX button getting its indicator to light Up It is not possible to select and play both Drums SFX and The Drums SFX button indicator will alternate between on lit and off dark Manual Percussion buttons ue E imult ly each time it is pressed sunuoneously The Drums SFX drums sound effects screen will be displayed for several seconds Drums SFX ROCK STANDARD 2 JAZZ BRUSH ROOM a VOX DRUM ROOM 2 van 2 Play the Lower keyboard and listen to the various drum For some drum sets there will sounds on each key be keys that do not sound 66 TST MOTT TAT Changing Drums SFX Sets As the drum set you can choose the types of drum set and sound effect When you change the drum set the sound produced by each note will change Immediately after the power is turned on the POP drum set will sound Press the Drums SFX button getting its indicator to light up The Drums SFX screen will be displayed for several seconds Drums SEX tt pr STANDARD ROCK STANDARD 2 JAZZ BRUSH BRUSH ROM O e VOX DRUM DRUM ROM2 2 a Er a gt While the Drums SFX screen is displayed touch a Drum SFX set name in the screen The Drums SFX button indicator will begin to blink You can select fro
259. r the effect depth keyboard etc S R a es are always shown in the right Rec Play side of the screen 15 Play back or record a song You can also view a notation display while a song plays Registration 16 Load Registrations from user memory into internal memory or save Registrations Registration related settings can also be made here Main 17 Returns you to the main screen if any screen other than the main screen is open 30 This icon is displayed when the V LINK function is on VL INK EE V LINK function p 215 This icon is shown for SMF music files SMF This icon is displayed when any portion of the recorded song has been altered This icon is also shown if you ve recorded a song but not yet saved it About the Icons Controller Drums SFX L Foot Switch R Foot Switch Registration Shift JAZZ BRUSH VOX DRUM Damper Pedal Button Meaning Depending on the function some screens are spread over gt lt g gt lt B to display the next or previous page of the screen multiple pages You can touch lt In the Load screen Save screen or File Edit screen you can select a file by touching lt B J Touch this when you want to exit close the currently displayed screen This icon is shown for Active Expression voice Active Expression Voice p 59 This icon is shown for EX voice Ex Voice p 51 Sub windows When you touch lt Ut
260. rd from the AC outlet If there is a possibility of lightning strike immedi ately turn off the power and disconnect the power Z cord from the AC outlet Cautions when opening closing the lid Be careful when opening closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched p 21 Adult super A vision is recommended whenever small children use the unit Cautions when using the seat You must observe the following cautions when using the seat e Do not play with the seat or use it as a stepstool e Do not allow two or more people to sit on the seat simultaneously e Do not sit on the seat if the bolts fastening the legs are loose If they are loose use the included tool to retighten them Keep small items out of the reach of children To prevent small items such as the following from being swallowed accidentally keep them out of the reach of children e Included items e Music rest attachment screws e Screws for assembling the stand e Cord clamps e Caps e Knob bolts USING THE UNIT SAFELY GS SG is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation XGlite XE is a registered trademark of Yamaha XGlite Corporation All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners P Important Notes ower Supply Do not connect this device to the same electrical outlet as an inverter controlled device such as a refrigerator microwave ove
261. reen the metronome will sound a two measure count and then recording will begin As you listen to the performance song previously recorded record the Part into a new Track You can also start recording by pressing the Composer Play Stop button B MEMO 6 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Stop gt to stop recording The track button for which performance data has been recorded will be lit You can also stop recording by pressing the Composer Play Stop button B MEMO 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to record each part 165 Keig no 24M yorg Bulhe q Bulpiooey Recording Playing Back What You Play omes ETAN Re Recording If you made a mistake in your performance during recording etc you can re record just a portion of the musical data in the track If you wish to re record with different settings for voices tempo part balance erase the recorded song p 167 and re record again If the Control track still contains data from before you re recorded the volume or sounds may change during playback 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play ATELIER O1 al Track _ opoogsao Solo apogon ea 2 Touch lt Bwd gt and lt Fwd gt to select the desired measure bar when you start recording If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song touch lt Reset gt 3 Inthe Rec Play screen touch l
262. reml or Banjo Treml sound Sound is produced when you take If you select a Marimba Treml or Banjo Treml sound a sound will also be produced when you take your finger off the key your finger off a key Some keys of certain keyboard parts sound strange The Pedal To Lower button or the Bass Bass is heard even though you are Split is at ON not playing the Bass Pedalboard Lower keyboard When playing the same sound in The Initial Touch setting is different the Upper keyboard and Lower between the upper keyboard and keyboard the volume is different lower keyboard If you layer the same type of sound for example Strings 1 and Strings 5 or play an octave shifted organ sound the timing at which you play a note or the phase relationship between the two sounds may affect the way in which the sounds are heard but this is not a The sound is not played correctly malfunction When the Pedal To Lower button is ON the Bass will be sounded by the Troubleshooting gt Oo 5 Q O D o Keep the phone as far away as possible or turn off its power Bulooysejqnol Set Initial Touch to ON Turn Lower Voice Hold off This is not a malfunction In the Pedal part press the Pedal To Lower button or set Bass Split to OFF Set Initial Touch to the same setting for both the upper keyboard and lower keyboard You
263. restrained by 4 a a increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions You can e Touch a Division name to select the Division also modify a song by changing the voice of the parts in the Divisions Division Select 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 Rhythm Customize UserRhythm 1 474 J 120 D ampuee 1a Original dae a ee Ue 1g to This returns you to the Rhythm Customize screen The name of the selected division now appears in the Rhythm Customize screen You can touch lt oral gt to hear how the Rhythm sounds swy yy puowuedwoovoy jeuIBUC Bulyeai5 189 Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms u Loading the Rhythm Use the Rhythm Customize function to select the Rhythm you want to use as the base for the Rhythm you are creating 1 Bring up the Rhythm Customize screen p 188 Rhythm Customize 4 4 2 J 120 amp a J mio d Esa s 2 Touch lt gt Utility The Utility screen appears od 3 Touch lt Load gt The Rhythm Load screen appears Rhythm Load fae Dieet 2 LooseBigBand 4 A 3 Big Serenade 4 Fast BigBand _ DEE 190 4 Touch Group Media lt gt lt gt to select Rhythm group Rhythm Load Fea os J Sound KBD thats vento In 2 slow Rumba bie ine _ 3 Trad Tango A Latin Fusion i a oo 5
264. roblems Problem Check Page you be using USB memory not We cannot guarantee operation re Son treaa ae USR memory made by Roland using USB memory not made by Roland The positioning of the Touch Screen may become displaced if some time Reposition the Touch screen p 217 has passed since it was last used The Touch Screen doesn t respond correctly First delete some other Rhythm saved to the user memory then save the Rhythm p 196 you have created to the user memory p 197 once again Memory Full appears in the display The available memory remaining in the ATELIER is not sufficient Unable to save created Rhythm to the User Memory 247 Error Message Copy Protected Can t Save Write Protected Media Error Message Meanings To protect the copyright this music file cannot be saved as SMF format The protect tab of the storage media is set to the Protect write prohibit position Move the tab to the Write write permit position and try the operation again Can t Save This Song You can only play the music data It cannot be saved on a storage media This storage media does not allow initialization or saving Insert a different storage media and try the Master Disk ee J J y operation again Read Only File You cannot overwrite save or delete a file on this storage media No Media Storage media is not connected Please connect storage media Media Full Saving is not
265. ronome Volume Rec Play Options Metronome Vol Metronome Sound Beat CD Audio Type 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 1 10 Increasing the value will raise the volume of the metronome 7 Touch lt Exit gt 207 sBulles 194 0 SNOEN Various Other Settings EA Changing the Sound of the Metronome You can choose one of 4 different sounds for the metronome 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears Touch lt Options gt The Rec Play Options screen appears Touch lt M gt lt B gt to display the Metronome Sound Rec Play Options Metronome Vol Metronome Sound Beat CD Audio Type M J Sound KBD 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting CLICK amp BELL ELECTRONIC VOICE ENG VOICE JPN Description Conventional metronome sound Electronic metronome sound Human voice English Human voice Japanese 7 Touch lt Exit gt gt MEMO This setting remains stored in memory even while power is turned off 208 Setting the Beat This setting determines the beat to be used when recording performance songs 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears 2 Touch lt o gt Utility The Utility screen appears 3 Touch lt Options gt The Rec
266. rticularly unsuitable for the display in the display of difficult complex musical works that demand accurate notation This is not a malfunction p 162 If you select a part that does not contain performance data notes will Change the part that is displayed p 161 not be displayed in the notation 241 Troubleshooting No Sound is Heard Problem No sound is heard Lower keyboard cannot be heard Upper keyboard cannot be heard No sound is heard when external devices are connected There is no sound from the twelve keys at the right of the lower keyboard 242 Cech o o Pa The Master Volume slider is set too Turn the Master Volume knob toward 27 low Max P Headphones are connected When you connect the headphones If you want sound to be output from the the sound is heard only through the speakers disconnect the headphones headphones The plug is still plugged into the Disconnect the plug from the headphone 23 headphone jack jack P The volume is set too low on the Level Press the Level A V buttons to raise the 62 A V buttons volume P The volume is set too low on the Expression Pedal Advance the expression pedal p 123 Press a voice button to select a voice You do not have a Voice selected Voices that have their button indicator lit p 47 can be played Drums SFX are selected for the Lower keyboard but you are playing a key to which no drum sound is
267. s Lower Voice Hold On The notes played on the lower keyboard will continue sounding 2 Press the Pedal To Lower button so its indicator goes out The sound that was being sustained will stop and the instrument will return to the normal playing state 70 Using Rhythm Performance The ATELIER lets you enjoy playing along with a Rhythmic accompaniment Selecting a Rhythm The ATELIER provides various Rhythms and Automatic Accompaniments Music Styles The ten buttons below are called Rhythm buttons and let you select Rhythms that are categorized by musical style Rhythm Big Band Country Oldies Swing Gospel Contempo Ballad World CR JLCEJCEIJCE ILS Waltz Trad Latin March Showtime Acoustic User LZ ES SS aa Aea Press a Rhythm button to select a Rhythm group The indicator will light A Rhythm screen like the following appears Rhythm o M EMO For details refer to the Voice List Appendix separate booklet os M EMO You can also open the Rhythm screen by touching lt Rhythm gt in the Main screen SOURWUOLed WyYMyYy Bulsn aa _ e Big Serenade Club Swing Fast BigBand Vocal Swing Hg eS The Rhythms in the selected Rhythm group appear in the display 2 Touch lt lt J to switch screens and touch a Rhythm name to select the desired Rhythm The indicator of Rhythm button will blink 3 Press the Rhythm button once
268. s simbolis rodo kad ES alyse is produktas turi b ti surenkamas atskirai nuo buitiniy atlieky kaip nustatyta kiekviename regione Siuo simboliu pa enklinti produktai neturi b ti i metami kartu su buitin mis atliekomis is simbols nor da ka ES valst s o produktu j iev c atsevi i no m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem k noteikts katr regiona Produktus ar o simbolu nedr kst izmest kop ar m jsaimniec bas atkritumiem Ta simbol ozna uje da je treba proizvod v dr avah EU zbirati lo eno od gospodinjskih odpadkov tako kot je dolo eno v vsaki regiji Proizvoda s tem znakom ni dovoljeno odlagati skupaj z gospodinjskimi odpadki To o u o o avt vro ni ver OTL otis YMOES THS E E to ovyxexoru vo TEOLOV no nEL va OVAAEYVETAL YOQLOT at ta vr ova omax ATOLETMMATA ovupwova ue OO TOOPAEMOVTAL oe n s TEQLOYN Ta moot vta TOV PEQOVV TO ovyxexoru vo O uPoo Sev TQ NTEL VA ATOQQ TTOVTAL LACE LE TA OLALAXG ATOQQ ULATA For China AA m P eA E A a N Di A AS GURBLBLAS ZS FP m PR REA RANEE T A KEREM F 2007 E3 H1 EAER ZS S ATRE r m o aR R tE M FA R bkin aos te H TE F E E N E g E A EA m RIRE REZ AREH W RE E A hie H E IA EWRA Prin HIT ee A Se RAN BS AES BE DRWA A We BO BAAS R MH SUA SPR FER i BE DOS TE RAED in ARE RA io ARNE RS eB RAMEE FE eo Pi PAA SARRULRNARREE Hee CEL hil Fae Se HEE PR aver ANR Cr VD saaw x o o _ o pO pox e x To i o i o
269. sation Do not leave this device in direct sunlight near devices that produce heat or in a closed up automobile Do not allow illumination devices operated in close proximity such as a piano light or powerful spotlights to shine on the same location on this device for an extended time This can cause deformation or color change If you move this device between locations of radically different temperature or humidity water droplets condensation may form inside the device Using the device in this condition will cause malfunctions so please allow several hours for the condensation to disappear before you use the device Do not allow items made of rubber or vinyl to remain on top of this device for an extended time This can cause deformation or color change Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard or pedal board This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Do not affix adhesive labels to this device The exterior finish may be damaged when you remove the labels Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on which you place the unit its rubber feet may discolor or mar the surface You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to prevent this from happening If you do so please make sure that the unit will not slip or move accidentally Care For everyday care wipe with a soft dry cloth or remove stubborn dirt using a tightly wrung out cloth If this d
270. seeeeeeenueews ATELIER and on the speaker you re about to connect 2 Turn off the connected speaker 3 Turn off the ATELIER OO OG L Mono R L Mono R Output Input Input Line In jack 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the speaker you re about to connect Switch on the connected speaker 2 Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the speaker 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection 4 Switch on the ATELIER 5 6 Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the connected speaker When you play the ATELIER s keyboard the sound is played from the connected speakers 228 Connecting with External Device Playing Sounds from Audio Equipment s Through the ATELIER Connecting a Computer The following become possible once you connect a USB cable available separately between the USB connector located to the lower left of the ATELIER and the USB connector of your computer e You can use the ATELIER to play sounds from SMF music files played back with MIDI software e By exchanging MIDI data with sequencer software you can save songs recorded with the ATELIER to your computer and enjoy a variety of musical control and ANAN ANN editing features L M R L M R Sore SFA Connect the ATELIER to your computer as shown below Stereo Set etc Output Line Out jack 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device you re abo
271. selected Rhythm the Arranger function automatically adds an accompaniment that is suitable for the chord being pressed on the Lower keyboard When the Arranger On Off button is on Sync Start p 76 Arranger on the pedalboard cannot be On Off used CZ 1 Press the Arranger On Off button indicator lights Arranger On Off button Function Lit On Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment Unlit Off Rhythm The lower voice is not played 2 Start the Rhythm p 75 during the performance of the intro and ending even when The Rhythm and the Automatic Accompaniment will play together the ewer kayboctd ieplaved If the Arranger On Off button is ON and no Pedal Bass voice is selected the Automatic Accompaniment will play the bass sound 78 Using Rhythm Performance Adding Variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment You can add variety to the Rhythm or Automatic Accompaniment by changing the Rhythm pattern of the Rhythm or the arrangement of the Automatic Hy y y i The functions of the Variation Accompaniment or by inserting a break i e stopping the Rhythm for one butions and riii Break measure button can be assigned to the foot switches located on each Auto Break side of the Expression Pedal oa e Please refer to Changing the Fill In Function of the Foot Switch p 121 Button name Function A fill in will automatically be added when you press e CEK
272. self Transposing the Song to a Comfortable Key for Singing 240 You can transpose the song to a key that is more comfortable for you to sing If you or someone else will be singing along with a song you can change the key of the song so it s appropriate for the singer s range Touch Playback Transpose lt gt lt gt on the VIMA Tunes screen Each time you touch Playback Transpose lt gt lt gt the key is changed by one semitone Touch lt gt to lower the key or touch lt gt to raise the key This can be set in a range of 6 O 5 semitone steps The VIMA TUNES screen shows the value you ve specified Nore If you touch Playback Transpose lt gt lt gt to select 0 If you select a different song Key Control will be turned off the playback transpose settings will return to their factory set state Troubleshooting If the ATELIER does not function in the way you except first check the following chart If this does not resolve the problem consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station gt Oo O 5 Q O D o Power does not Turn On potion Ron When you press the Power On Bape ate Power cord is not connected correctly Connect the power cord correctly p 21 switch the power doesn t come on Problems with the Screen Display n ck O o The ATELIER uses a liquid crystal screen so text may not be displayed This is n
273. set button and pressing the Upper Organ Jazz button switches the instrument to MODE 2 p 215 The display changes as shown below and the ATELIER switches to Image Control mode Video Link System is ON The V LINK function is turned on and the V LINK icon appears in the main screen To cancel the V LINK function once again hold down the Composer Reset bution and press either the Upper Organ Full button or the Upper Organ Jazz button If set to MODE 1 p 215 holding down the Composer Reset button and pressing the Upper Organ Full button switches the V LINK function off If set to MODE 2 p 215 holding down the Composer Reset button and pressing the Upper Organ Jazz button switches the V LINK function off Viewing the Contents of the ATELIER s Screen on a External Display You can use your external display to view the contents of the ATELIER s built in screen 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt A gt lt J gt to display the Screen Out X System USB Driver GENERIC V LINK Screen Out 3 Touch the Screen Out setting to switch between ON and OFF Setting Description The contents of the ATELIER s screen will be shown on your external display ON The contents of the ATELIER s screen will not be OFF shown on your external display The ATELIER logo will be shown If the Slide Show
274. signed by default but you can assign a name that will help you later to identify the contents of the Registration set 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen MEMO The Registration Load screen appears You can also open the Registration Load screen by E pressing the Registration AA Registration Load button on the panel ul ED oreasr o1 UZ REGIS I 02 03 REGIST 03 CA Registration O4 REGIST 04 ee i ay 2 Touch lt go to Save gt The Registration Save screen appears MA Registration Save ae M 02 REGIST 02 e 03 REGIST 03 Beg 3 Touch lt oO gt Utility The Utility screen appears MA Registration Save 130 ul 101 suong uolnejsibey y Buispy a Using the Registration Buttons 4 102 nar AANA TAU Touch lt Rename gt ib The Rename screen appears The Rename screen can also be opened in the following ways Main screen lt Registration gt gt Registration Load screen lt Utility gt Utility screen lt Rename gt Touch lt EYE gt to change among uppercase lowercase symbols Each touch of the character switch button takes you to the next available choice like this uppercase gt lowercase gt symbols gt uppercase Touch the screen to specify the desired character The following characters can be selected Uppercase ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Lowercase a
275. sound is called Count In 1 Hold down the Reset button and press the Play Stop button The metronome will play two measures bars of countin before recording begins Tre wu MENIN Recording Playing Back What You Play Recording Each Part Separately In this method each part track button is recorded one after another first the Rhythm part then the bass part etc If there are any previously recorded performances you can listen to them as you record additional parts 1 Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance 2 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Rec Play screen appears Rec Play NEW SONG ee CCK opoogsa ag Solo Eero 3 Touch lt Bwd gt and lt Fwd gt to select the desired measure bar when you start recording If you wish to start recording from the beginning of the song touch lt Reset gt 4 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Rec gt to enter recording standby mode lt Play gt and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink The track buttons that are already recorded will light blink Rec Play NEW SONG Also the Rec button indicator will light and the Play Stop button will blink m You can also enter recording standby mode by pressing the or Composer Rec button 9 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Play gt to begin recording When you touch lt Play gt in the Rec Play sc
276. spose button indicators are If not transposed C extinguished By pressing the Transpose buttons simultaneously you can restore the default setting C MEMO The transposition setting is stored in the Registration For details on the settings that are stored in the Registration refer to Settings That Are Stored In the Registration Buttons p 253 MEMO You can change the timing at which the transposition settings saved in a Registration will be recalled For details refer to Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled p 205 117 suonouny 2uewo d au HuIsN Using the Performance Functions a BS oms Adjusting the Brightness of the Sound Using the Brilliance slider you can adjust the brightness of the sound For a brighter sound push the slider away from you For a mellower sound pull the slider toward you Bright Mellow Brilliance You can adjust not only the treble range but the bass as well with the Brilliance slider You can suppress the lower frequencies by moving the slider downwards Adding Decay to the Sound Damper Pedal 118 When you depress the Damper Sustain pedal a decay effect will be added to the voices While you continue depressing the damper pedal notes will be sustained even if you release the keys By default the decay effect will be applied to the voices played on the Lower keybo
277. ssion Pedal Selecting the Keyboard Affected by the Specify how the Expression Pedal will function when your Damper Pedal performance is being recorded and when ATELIER song files You can specify which keyboard will be affected when you are being played back press the Damper Sustain pedal Function During Recording 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen eeoeeoeeoeeoeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeoeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeee 8 The Sound Keyboard screen appears Specify whether Expression Pedal operations will be recorded or not while your performance is being recorded 2 Touch lt Controller gt en een ren 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Controller screen appears The Sound Keyboard screen appears Touch lt Q gt lt J gt to display the D s Pedal lt B gt lt B gt to display the Damper 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears Controll Em 2 130 D L 3 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to display the Exp Src L Foot Switch f GLIDE Rec SESS ORM ROTARY FAST SLON Registration Shift OFF Controller Damper Pedal to LOWER 7 Exp Sro Rec PEDAL n 5 sounaran SOCA PEDAL COMPOSER Exp Curve Bender Vibrato to UPPER 4 Touch the Damper Pedal setting to switch between to UPPER and to LOWER LY Each time you touch the Damper Pedal setting it will alternate between to UPPER and to LOWER 4 Touch the Exp Src Rec settin
278. ssion Pedal recording within the song tile will be effective The Expression Pedal will function The Expression Pedal recording within the song file will be ignored 6 Touch lt Exit gt 200 Choosing the Keyboard for which Pitch Bend and Vibrato will Apply This setting determines which keyboard will be controlled by the Pitch Bend Vibrato lever 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen The Sound Keyboard screen appears 2 Touch lt Controller gt The Controller screen appears 3 Touch lt M gt lt J gt to display the Bender Vibrato Controller Exp Sre Rec Exp Src Play Exp Curve Bender Vibrato elanude lsi4 Exp Sro_fRec 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting Description The effect is applied to the voices played on the i Upper keyboard The effect is applied to the voices played on the ee Lower keyboard The effect is applied to the voices played on the 1O PEDAL Pedalboard 6 Touch lt Exit gt strane Various Other Seting Changing the Pitch Bend Range Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller This setting allows you to choose the maximum amount of Pitch change range permissible when using Pitch Bend The range You can adjust the sensitivity of the D Beam controller can be set anywhere between 1 12 in semitone units with a l l Increasing this setting will make the D Beam controller
279. stenauaiemewiiead s 173 REJIS KONON arenar a A N R 251 Arranger Update x 1is cn2ssieaadetiededa ttnand ead 99 IWIN ocre 32 nines soars saenisencd tate rndaaeets dee 30 Recall arsen Nee renee een 98 RENOME oer anaa A 112 Storing Registrations xeccrmace cde ceeernteeredernent 97 Registration Shift since acencdiivekocasaehiaedbotandiabuasiaiteds 122 Rename Performance Song fedceicasaceaseweusuaneasnacncenndans 167 RegS TONON aior O 101 112 Saved RAVINS ossis E OR 92 RE RECOLGIING arsaa a 166 ec tei eone ener eee ee eee mene eee nr 251 Reverb ERECT misrit iei nena E E 136 Depth of the Reverb cicin 139 140 REVERO TYPE enci rr ease 137 Wall TYPE ssanie A 138 E E EE E AE EE E TTE 227 ROYI cras a EER 7 COUNTDOWN Sts aielounieerieetycnasuices apeetactdhatcnisen 78 CUSTOMIZE aaah ue ne E aaa eee 187 BUM My E EE lentes cee eae else A T 79 MOIM oreen aei Gace ddeiee ds AN 29 One Touch Program mesacrsetcewsaiacenesasaazesenacenaesen 85 Rhyihmi ModE seuna i 203 ROIO eceania e A E ne iiediele 251 Rotary EEGI oyeee aE EAAS 121 128 Rolary Color siccastivesadddaisarchidedehibadatiesnanAiads 130 Rotary Speed bates trea eatntorad tem ntetenacttcest ers 129 S Saving Performance SONGS esveseiccidnnciacieieirtnateden 169 Registration Sets ani chcdaciviererreddcuciee ec uavnwie 103 User RMyihins 2eoiaaesacddcieaiahidadehidadaierneysh ads 197 Search RAVENI arenaen tauicgutacietaaeu aceatia stack 73 Sena CO WHC Maa cuenta tise 211 262
280. switch between DELAYED and INSTANT Each time you touch the Arranger Update setting it will alternate between DELAYED and INSTANT Setting Description MEMO You can change the timing of When you press and hold a Registration button 1 8 for several seconds the settings for Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment will be recalled in addition to the panel settings recalling the transpose setting when you press a Registration DELAYED button If you press and immediately release a Registration button 1 Forder Chanaina 8 only the settings that are not related to Rhythm or Automatic ihe Timing at Which Accompaniment will be recalled Transposition Settings are The panel settings and settings for Rhythm and Automatic Recalled p 205 INSTANT Accompaniment will be recalled the instant that you press a Registration button 1 8 5 Touch lt Exit gt Automatically Registering When You Switch Panel Settings When the Manual button is ON lit all panel settings you make will be stored automatically in the Manual button as they are made thus updating Thersen ngeaioted inthe the Registration that had been previously saved Manual button will return to their default values when the power is turned off E 100 u i Using the Registration Buttons Assigning a Name to a Registration Set When saving Registration sets names like Factory Reg will be as
281. t 3 dcis chive seoveshenseresstebeveinteriesweese 208 Metronome Sound cccecceccecceceeceecuscesenseuces 208 Metronome Volume cccceceeceeceececesceseuseuces 207 INC ok as a a shearer ee ae ise at a Pe eat esd 227 oc een an a en OAA Ce ree re E ENT 23 MC ECNO airea a a 211 Mic Volume sicteceetcesarsceeecese cele cteeatseareteaie reas 23 IWIGFOPNOMG terene eran e eres tea EN 23 PONE a E E EEE ae Ree nae E 231 MIDI Devices CONNEC NO Sere core E E E E 231 MIDI IN Mode cccesceececeeccsceccescuseucencencencs 212 MIDI Ji QU urere a 227 Music Assistant soso ebtonit once hat coh ianee ioe coed auhae 37 Main Screen cceceecececseeccrcecectcscereeceees 29 Music Assistant Search csceeceseeeceseeceeceecees 39 NATO ok SD Mee et anal eer ee ery eee ee ee 239 240 Musie Files meiir aehiatcatasetdasaaeates 252 MUIS actos ich abaakbaladnceguadel ates a 251 N Roa Usk Penaren senator ced Nadu een tin ee ees 160 O Octave SHIM crnina en nE 64 One Touch Programm sicnsesceneenctinedtencseiedads 84 85 P Panel Reset oaiinannieeaota ta e a tE aA 219 Panel COMINGS iienaa EEE 251 Parn BaldnC eceran E ea en 62 Part Balance Monitor ccceccecceceecescescuseuseeees 63 PE NUMOS aredd tiri E A 212 Pedal garse eiee E EE E EEAS 49 Pedal Bass Voice cccccescescuccecceccecetcseuseuseuees 49 Pedal To Lower o oionoooonsnsanononnnsosisorororsrreseren 152 PedalBass Mode cecceceecc
282. t Rec gt to enter recording standby mode lt Play gt and the unrecorded track buttons in the screen will blink The button indicators of tracks that are already recorded will light lit blink odza j Also the Rec button indicator will light and the Play Stop button will blink em You can also enter recording standby mode by pressing the lmam Rec button 166 4 Touch the Track button which you wish to re recording button flashes The song data of the specified Track with the exception of the Control Track will be erased as new song data is recorded When the Track button is lit constantly no song data has MEMO E been recorded on that Track 9 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Play gt to begin recording The metronome will sound a two measure count and then recording will begin You can also start recording by pressing the Play Stop button 6 In the Rec Play screen touch lt Stop gt to stop recording The track buttons which were re recorded will change from flashing to being constantly lit You can also stop recording by pressing the Play Stop button B If you wish to keep the existing Expression Pedal data and record only the panel operations you can make settings to prevent the operation of the Expression Pedal from being recorded p 199 You can use punch in recording p 174 to re record only the area that you specify
283. t the USB memory to the External Memory 5 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the save panneron destination media If you want to save performance song to a floppy disk Select Ext Memory to save the data in USB memory connect the flo disk drive to the Ext Drive connector peat i og PPY select Disk to save it on a floppy disk or Favorites to Into the floppy disk drive insert a floppy disk that was formatted by the ATELIER 2 6 Touch lt H lt to select the number of the Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen se save destination save it in user memory The Rec Play screen appears y PP If the save destination contains no data the screen will n z indicate Rec Play ATELIER 05 Song Save Song Delete Ijinternal ATELIER 05 Madia Favorites 02 ATELIER 02 03 ATELIER 03 04 ATELIER 04 uE fd Sound KBD CK el Solo Control oooooac Reset Stop Play Rec Bud Fwd 3 Touch lt gt Utility a To cancel the Save operation touch lt Exit gt to close the The Utility screen appears Song Save Song Delete screen Song Select Punch In Out Z 7 e Touch lt Save gt 4 sounaran The Save Format screen appears Save Delete m A Save Format Original Cancel 169 Keld NOA yeuM yorg Buike 4 6ulpsooey tone Wy sola 8 Touch the screen to select the
284. table for ensemble performances and other performances featuring multiple instruments 124 Rhythm Auto Accompaniment Keyboard Part NNi Rhythm Auto Accompaniment Keyboard Part N M Rhythm Auto Accompaniment Keyboard Part Rhythm Auto Accompaniment a Keyboard Part NI 6 Touch lt Exit gt Sem This setting remains stored in memory even while power is lam turned off Adding Harmony to a Melody Harmony Intelligence Applying Various Effects to the Sound The ATELIER allows you to apply various effects to the sounds you play from the keyboard Harmony appropriate for the chord you play in the lower keyboard can be added to the highest note played in the upper keyboard This function is called Harmony Intelligence When you press the Harmony Intelligence button the voice most suitable for the selected harmony intelligence will be selected automatically Harmony Intelligence E Press the Harmony Intelligence button indicator lights Each time you press the button the indicator will alternate between ON lit and OFF unlit The name of the selected Harmony Intelligence will be displayed for several seconds in the screen Harmony Intelligence BIG BAND _ HARP STRINGS COMBO BLOCK JAZZ SCAT COUNTRY elton Im 125 punos y 0 S 2944 SnoWe Bulsjddy a Applying Various Effects to the Sound Sem N
285. taff of bo the upper part 2 Touch lt DigiScore gt eee The Notation screen appears F Clef Displayed the F clet staff of the upper part Fur Elise Eb 4s a Display is switched Bs se Me automatically c Displayed the G clef staff of Clef Lower G Clef helegengiaet 0 E Clef Displayed the F clef staff of the lower part AUTO Key is switched automatically Db Ab Eb Bb F 3 Touch lt Option gt CG D A The Notation Options screen appears K E B F ey Bbm Fm Display the notation in the Cm Gm selected key Dm Am Em Bm F m C m G m D m Notation Options Pitches Clef Upper Clef Lower Select the part to be displayed as the upper part Key Upper Part 1 16 2 lower Pare 12S Select the part to be displayed as the lower part es Bass Part 1 16 Select the part to be displayed Notation Options as the bass part Upper Part 4 Upper Lower Part 3 Lower Bass Part 2 Bass Keig no 24M yorg Bulhe q 6ulpiooey 161 rte bl War von e Em 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Some Notes on a Notation Screen d 130 Notation Options P 2 2 p LE e When you start playback of music files the marks X Upper Part appears While this appears on the notation the ATELIER is reading data Please wait until reading of the data is Lower Part complete Bass Part e In the Notation scr
286. tch Filter or Pitch Lit green A bass drum and cymbal will sound Wele Suton rine Desai Filter The cymbal will be struck with gradually is lit m red an effect will be increasing force applied to the sound when you move your hand above the D Volume Lit green The sound of a wind chime is produced Beam controller p 141 2 Move your hand above the D Beam controller The sound effect assigned to the D Beam controller will play Turning the D Beam Controller Off 3 Press the button you pressed in step 1 several times so its light is turned off 142 MEMO Applying Various Effects to the Sound 143 Using the Lower Keyboard Effectively Making Effective Use of the Lower Keyboard Since the lower keyboard of the ATELIER provides a generous 64 notes you can use it to play piano pieces with ease In addition you can divide the keyboard into two or more sections and play solo voices play the pedal bass voice or combine a variety of uses for even more versatility For example the following applications are possible Using the Lower Keyboard to Play the Solo Voice gt Press the Solo To Lower button in the Solo section to Play the Solo voice to the Lower keyboard p 146 E Drums SFX E Manual Percussion ss gt Press the Manual Percussion button to play drum sounds or sound effects with the Lower voice on the lower keyboard p 68 E Drums SFX E Manual Percussion ss E Drums SFX E Manual
287. tch of the Upper and Solo part Lower To change the pitch of the Lower part Pedal To change the pitch of the Pedal part 3 Touch lt J lt J to display the Octave Shift 64 4 3 6 ect Touch the part display of the part whose Octave Shift settings you wish to change Upper Keyboard anek BrassSect 1 Solo Trumpet Touch lt gt lt gt to adjust the settings The value can be set to a range of 3 octaves Upper Keyboard Touch lt Exit gt You will return to the Upper Keyboard Lower Keyboard Pedalboard screen Selecting and Playing Sounds 1 MEMO You can open the Pedalboard screen Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching lt Pedal gt lt Lower gt and lt Upper gt MEMO When the power is turned on the Octave Shift setting for the Pedal part will be set to 1 1 octave down Please note that when you apply the Octave Shift function to certain voices their pitch could be stretched beyond their recommended note ranges and they may not sound as expected Care should be taken when using Octave Shift 65 spunos 6ulhe q pue Bulj9a 8S a Sea UII Selecting and Playing Sounds i SRA ANATA EYE AH AT Playing Drum Sounds or Sound Effects from the Entire Lower Keyboard Drums SFX You can use the Lower keyboard to play various drum sounds drum set In MEMO this case the Lower voices will no longe
288. the ATELIER to a V LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the ATELIER V LINK V LINK VAR is a function that allows music and images to be performed together By using MIDI to connect two or more V LINK compatible devices you can easily enjoy a wide range of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of a music performance How to Use the V LINK EE EE EE EE EE SE EE EE EE EE E E E e e o e e o o a E e e O e e E eee e 8 The Send PC Switch settings is automatically switched to ON when V LINK is on MODE 1 MODE 2 When the V MEMO LINK function is switched off the Send PC Switch setting reverts to the setting in effect before V LINK was switched The System screen appears o 2 Touch lt 0 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen gt lt i gt to display the V LINK When V LINK is set to MODE 1 When a Registration button is pressed Bank Select System and Program Change Number messages are USB Driver GENERIC transmitted from the MIDI Out connector as video V LINK control messages At this time the Control MIDI 4 Rec Play transmit channel setting is disregarded and the Screen Out messages are transmitted via Channel 16 Q Registration a When V LINK is set to MODE 2 In addition to the functions of MODE 1 MODE 2 also sets the device to transmit Note messages as video control messages from the
289. the Lower keyboard For details refer to Playing the Solo Voice on the Lower Keyboard Solo To Lower Button p 146 MEMO It is possible to change how a Solo voice will sound Normally the Solo voice will be sounded by the highest note you play on the Upper keyboard but you can make settings so that the lastplayed note will sound the Solo voice For details refer to Changing How the Solo Voice Responds p 147 EUW Selecting a Voice Using the Others Button Notice that there is an Others button for each part By using the Others button you can select all voices As with the other voice buttons the Others button can be assigned two voices You can use the Alternate button to switch between these two voices Press the Alternate button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice to select ON lit or OFF dark The setting of the Alternate button ON lit or OFF dark determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned Press the Others button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds Upper Organ ran _ Theater Or 3 Theater r7 Theater Or 4 Ex E _ AEX Theater Synth Org 1 P 6 8 _ Theater Or 4 xy zer ea m AEx Theater ET Synth Org 1 TTT Selecting and Playing Sounds
290. the PedalBass Mode 2 Touch either lt Upper gt or lt Lower gt Setting Description Keke Ubper To change the initial touch setting of the Sound KBD PP Upper part MONOPHONIC rch 0 B 1 rgan Dass Rec Play To change the initial touch setting of the Pa TTT Ae AU AACN n ANA a i VNTR l vill HE Lower 3 Touch lt amp gt lt gt to display the Initial Touch ppm a Eee Upper Keyboard z tee s Sa 1 ors Theater Ens 10 4 Touch the PedalBass Mode setting to switch between MONOPHONIC and 4 Rec Play POLYPHONIC oreh BrassSect 1 Each time you touch the PedalBass Mode setting it will solo TUmpet 10 alternate between MONOPHONIC and POLYPHONIC al or a B SS Setting Description MONOPHONIC Only single notes can be played 4 Touch the Initial Touch value OFF 1 10 POLYPHONIC Multiple notes can be played i 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to edit the value 5 Touch lt Exit gt Setting Description Initial Touch is on Striking the keys more forcefully will produce correspondingly louder sounds The change in volume when the keys are played forcefully increases as the value is increased Initial Touch is off OFF Volume remains constant regardless of how hard you play 6 Touch lt Exit gt 198 urna Various Oher Stings Performance Function Settings Changing the Function of the Expre
291. the power cord plug and the AC outlet can cause a short circuit possibly resulting in fire Manage cables for safety Ensure that the connected cables are organized and managed in a safe manner In particular place the cables out of reach of children Do not stand or place heavy objects on this device on it Do not stand on this device or place heavy objects S Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands Do not connect or disconnect the power cord to the T device or AC outlet while holding the power cord AD plug with wet hands Cautions when moving this device If you need to move the instrument take note of the precautions listed below Since this product is very heavy you must make sure that a sufficient number of people are on hand to help so you can lift and move it safely without causing strain It should be handled carefully all the while keeping it level Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage e Check whether the knob bolts fastening the device to its stand have become loose If they are loose tighten them firmly e Disconnect the power cord e Disconnect external devices e Close the lid e Remove the music stand A CAUTION Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning Before you clean the device turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Z e EC RC ESTA Bites disconnect the power co
292. these Rhythms with Rhythms from USB memory or floppy disk Rhythms copied from the USB memory into User memory will not be lost even if the power is turned off It is convenient to copy frequently used Rhythms into User memory Rhythms that you ve created and saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory p 89 Copying Rhythms from USB Memory to User Memory 1 Connect the USB memory to the External Memory MEMO connector If you want to copy Rhythms from floppy disk connect the floppy disk drive to the Ext 2 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen Drive connector The Rhythm screen appears Rhythm a e es Sarom as Sr es CT 3 Touch lt Ep gt Utility on the Rhythm screen The Utility screen appears 87 SOUBUUOLOg WUIAYY Buisn aa Using Rhythm Performance 4 3 88 I ull u Touch lt File Edit gt The Rhythm File Edit screen appears Rhythm File Edit Down 2 Delete Bh Copy ay Touch lt Copy gt Rhythm Copy The Rhythm File Copy screen appears Rhythm File Copy ae Cd C Registration r j Execute Si i Touch lt gt lt gt to select the media the location of the Rhythm you want to copy If you want to copy a Rhythm from USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to copy a Rhythm from floppy disk select Disk Touch lt 0 lt to select the Rhythm you want to copy
293. tion Load M button on the panel LI 02 REGIST 02 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 Touch lt go to Save gt rey MEMO The Registration Save screen appears lami If you wish to assign a name before you save refer to MA Registration Save z Assigning a Name to a ii u Registration Set p 101 03 REGIST 03 04 REGIST 04 OVREGIST 01 02 REGIST 02 __O4REGIST 04 Touch lt gt lt gt to select the desired media If you want to save the Registration to User memory select User If you want to save the Registration to USB memory select Ext Memory If you want to save the Registration to floppy disk select Disk 103 suong uolnejsibey y Buispn Using the Registration Buttons 5 LL 5 7 104 CEMA Touch lt H lt 5 in the screen to select the save er destination num Numbers which have not been used in the saving operation will be displayed MA Registration Save J 130 aM 1 Li SS 02 REGIST 02 as 03 REGIST 03 fo recrpay 04 REGIST 04 a CA Registration go to Load S To cancel the Save operation touch lt Exit gt to close the Registration Save screen Touch lt Save gt a M EMO The Save Format screen appears You can also save Registrations i in a folder Refer to Saving MM Save Format 7 2 z Registrations in a folder p J Sound KBD Cancel Touch lt Original gt o
294. to a Registration Set p 101 8 Touch lt OK gt To cancel the operation touch lt Cancel gt Selecting a Registration from within a folder 1 Touch lt Registration gt on the Main screen to display the Registration Load screen 2 Touch lt A gt lt B gt to select a folder 3 Touch the folder name The Registrations in the folder will be displayed 4 Touch the Registration name To exit the folder 1 Touch lt gt lt B gt to select Up 2 Touch the Up indication Using the Registration Buttons NOTE If there s a Registration that you want to delete touch lt H lt i gt to select the Registration then touch lt Delete gt When a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears touch lt OK gt mo M EMO You can rename the folder in the Registration File Edit screen M EMO To create a folder refer to Creating a Folder p 44 113 suong uolejsibey y Buis q Be Bee ows Sn Using the Registration Buttons Copying Registrations Registrations from USB memory or floppy disk can be copied to user memory If a Registration saved in USB memory or on a floppy disk is stored in user memory the stored Registration data will not disappear even when you turn off the power It is convenient to load frequently used Registration into User memory Registrations saved in user memory can also be copied to USB memory p
295. to the foot ore switch The right foot switch is dedicated to switching RIGHT Registrations The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used 122 Setting Description The left foot switch is dedicated to switching LEFT Registrations The function assigned to the left foot switch cannot be used The right foot switch is dedicated to switching Registrations The function assigned to the right foot switch cannot be used Selecting the Registration 8 button and pressing the right foot switch activates the Load Next function calling up the next Registration saved to the USB memory user memory or floppy disk The Registration Load window appears in the display When you then press the right foot switch again the Registration Set is confirmed and the Registration 1 button is selected Example 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 8 gt Load Next gt Next Registration 1 RIGHT Load Next What is Load Next You can use the Load Next function to call up Registrations in the order saved to the USB memory user memory or floppy disk When you will be performing live you can save Registration sets to USB memory user memory or floppy disk in the order in which you will be performing Then while you perform you can recall the next Registration set easily and smoothly Checking the next Registration set 1 Display the Main screen p 29 2 REGIST 01 Next gt REGIST O2 Next will indic
296. tures Phones jacks These allow you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you even at night 2 Q Phones dl Mic mipi USB 00 20 a0 Connect your headphones to the Phones jack underneath the left side of the keyboard The sound from the built in speakers stops Now sound is heard only through the headphones Adjust the headphones volume with the Master Volume slider and Expression pedal Some Notes on Using Headphones A CAUTION To prevent damage to the cord handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug Headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in Lower the volume on the ATELIER before plugging in headphones To prevent possible auditory damage loss of hearing or damage to the headphones the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume Use the headphones at a moderate volume level Accepts connection of Stereo headphones If plugs of the headphones are plugged into the Phones jack no sound will be heard from the ATELIER s speakers Using a Microphone Since this instrument has a Mic jack you can use a microphone to enjoy a variety of possibilities such as singing along with your performance or singing along with SMF music files sold separately Phones dle Mic mipi USB 002 0 o0 1 Connect your microphone to the Mic jack underneath the left side of the keyboard 2 Use the
297. u press are sounded by each type of harmony MEMO intelligence is described below Harp type harmony intelligence does not sound the keys you m Namba af ots play Use you Ie hand pl cichord tithe ewer keyboard BIG BAND 5 and use your right hand to play STINGS Larsens tll BLOCK Vibraphone Piano 1 5 glissando will be produced TRADITIONAL Currently Selected Tone 3 HARP Harp 2 COMBO Clarinet Trombone 3 COUNTRY Full Organ1 Jazz Guitar 3 OCTAVE 1 Currently Selected Tone 2 OCTAVE 2 Currently Selected Tone 2 1 NOTE Currently Selected Tone 2 3 NOTES Currently Selected Tone 4 Terona ASIC ike BIG BAND Currently Selected Tone 5 harmony will depend on the STRINGS Currently Selected Tone 4 ii a ee BLOCK Currently Selected Tone 5 JAZZ SCAT Currently Selected Tone 4 punos y O s 2 44 SNoWe Bulsijddy 127 ELL nen o omom oomoo MARTEN N KAMALAN Applying Various Effects to the Sound Adding Modulation to the Sound Rotary Effect Rotary is an effect which simulates the sound of rotating speakers There is a choice of two settings Fast and Slow EE E A the Rotary effect can be ae applied refer to Voice List Appendix separate booklet On Off co Fast Slow Rotary Sound 1 Select the voice to which you wish to apply the Rotary effect 2 Press the Rotary Sound On Off button confirm that its indicator is lit The Rotary effect will be applied to the
298. unit is turned off performance data in the Favorites user memory USB memory or a floppy disk Problems with Playback Functions Problem Moving your hand over the D Beam controller does not produce a sound Expression Pedal does not operate Can t use the function assigned to the foot switch 246 If a D Beam button is lit in red moving your hand above the D Beam controller Press the D Beam button once again so will apply an effect to the sound you the button is lit in green pele play from the keyboard The function of the Expression Pedal Set the expression pedal function during during recording or the function during recording to PEDAL and during p 199 playback has been set to playback to PEDAL or COMPOSER PEDAL COMPOSER If Registration Shift change Registrations is RIGHT LEFT or RIGHT Load Next the foot switch Set Registration Shift to OFF p 122 will be dedicated to switching the Registration Troubleshooting len ek Seton e The damper pedal affects only the Lower keyboard and Upper keyboard The damper pedal does not affect the Bass pedalboard The damper pedal does not affect the Kay l This is not a malfunction 4 si Solo voice You can change the settings so that the damper pedal affects the Upper p 200 keyboard gt O 5 Q O D o Damper Pedal does not operate Bulooyusejqnol Other P
299. ussuecncuradetudiddsareuavanenauuanuunstulnsauleletidian ates nels talents ANSEES NaN 202 Turning Chord Hold On Off sph ikesci scat eaasscn va anelatohaaddelnaeath cpg achgadient Meas eonacieaaets 202 Changing the Intro Countdown Sound Count Down Sound ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeee eens 202 Preventing Rhythm Tempos from Switching Automatically cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 203 Changing the Operation of the Fill In Buttons ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 203 REG ISHOTON v eling gic rrcok reat aoceieoaent eee a eeeneeebaeaten tiene eer areas eoen 205 Changing the Timing at Which Arranger Settings are Recalled ccccceeeeeeeee eee 205 Changing the Timing at Which Transposition Settings are Recalled cccccceeeeee 205 COMPOSE SEMIS asta teers axis ntcaha cored a A 206 Switching the Display of Lyrics On or Off sezcceduceuiaccanuell die tah bce ceonatn neuen dccaaens 206 Changing the Key When Playing Back Songs Playback Transpose 00cccceceeeeees 206 Changing the Metronome Setting si 9anissaatencatewianideceasateanieawais neat tou taesdacoas Mectats 207 Adjusting the Metronome Volume a 2tes sxe ccosergechates ood beseeadstceeseaeeiagaiadaiteeaceiaceers 207 Changing the Sound of the Metronome cccccccccce eee eeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeaaaes 208 BOG PIN EB stare ateciece E eects tna rca E E E 208 Setting the Type of CD To Be Played Back cccccc
300. ut fo connect 2 Turn off the power to the ATELIER and the audio device 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the USB Cable connection Computer 4 Switch on the audio device 5 Switch on the ATELIER 6 Adjust the volume level on the ATELIER and the audio device The sounds from the connected audio device are played by the ATELIER Refer to the Roland website for system requirements Roland website http www roland com d eUse1xy UM BunoeuU0D Turning Off the Power 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the ATELIER and on the audio device you re about fo connect 2 Turn off the ATELIER 3 Turn off the audio device 229 Connecting with External Device n If connection to your computer is unsuccessful Coc ccccrccccccerceccc cece eceeccecce Normally you don t need to install a driver in order to connect the ATELIER to your computer However if some problem occurs or if the performance is poor using the Roland original driver may solve the problem Specify the USB driver you want to use and then install the driver For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver refer to the Roland website Roland website http www roland com Specify the USB driver you want to use for ATELIER and then install the driver Caution e To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn
301. utomatic Accompaniment Composer Song Registration Demo S5 O E Reset Play Stop Rec L a Z 3 4 2 1 Select the panel settings needed for recording the performance Enter the recording standby mode by pressing the Rec button The Rec button indicator will light and the Play Stop button will blink as Press the Play Stop button to start recording When you press the Play Stop button the metronome will play two measures bars of countin before recording begins If you wish to use Rhythm and Automatic Accompaniment as you record press the Start Stop button instead of the MEMO Play Stop button to begin recording Also if the Sync Start button is lit i e if Sync Start is ON recording will begin the instant you play the Lower keyboard 4 Press the Play Stop button when you have completed your recording The Track indicator where a performance song is recorded will change from a flashing to a constant light When you press the Intro Ending button or Start Stop button while recording a Rhythm performance or Automatic Accompaniment the Rhythm performance and Automatic Accompaniment will stop However the recording itself will continue Press the Play Stop button to stop recording The Play and Stop functions can both be assigned to one of TEMP the foot switches located on each side of the Expression Pedal p 121 Perrys You can also choose to cancel the metr
302. verb Type Reverb Depth Solo To Lower button ON OFF Pedal To Lower button ON OFF Transpose buttons Key Transpose L Foot Switch Assignment Left Foot Switch Assignment R Foot Switch Assignment Right Foot Switch Assignment Damper Pedal Damper Pedal Assignment Harmony Intelligence button ON OFF Harmony Intelligence Type Rotary Fast Slow button ON OFF Rotary On Off button ON OFF Bender Vibrato Pitch Bend Range Pedal Bass Mode Solo Mode Solo To Lower Mode Solo Split Point Bass Split ON OFF Bass Split Point Sustain ON OFF Sustain Length Tx MIDI Channel Initial Touch Initial Touch Sensitivity Vintage Organ Type VintageOrganVolume PC Number Program Change Number Bank LSB Bank Select LSB Bank MSB Bank Select MSB Wall Type The Voices assigned for each part Level A V button Part Balance Volume The Reverb depth for each part The Chorus settings ON OFF for each part The Octave shift settings for each part The voices assigned to the Others buttons for each part Drums SFX button ON OFF Drum SFX Set Manual Percussion button ON OFF Manual Percussion Set Selected Rhythm Intro Ending button ON OFF Sync Start button ON OFF Variation Chord Intelligence ON OFF Chord Hold ON OFF Leading Bass ON OFF Arranger ON OFF button ON OFF Lower Voice Hold ON OFF Tempo setting Volume of the Rhythm Accompaniment part Reverb depth of the Rhythm
303. voice 3 Press the Rotary Sound Fast Slow button to switch between Rotary Fast Lit and Rotary Slow Unlit MEMD You can assign the Rotary Sound Fast Slow button Rotary Fast Slow button Effect l l function to the foot switches i The effect obtained is equivalent to speakers being located on each side of the Lit Fast l rapidly rotated Expression Pedal p 121 Unlit Slow Effect simulating the slow rotation of speakers When you switch the rotary effect from Fast to Slow the modulation will slow down gradually and when you switch from Slow to Fast the modulation will speed up gradually 128 strane Applying Various Effects to the Sound Making Fine Adjustments to the Rotary Effect Speed Rotary Speed You can make fine adjustments to the speaker rotation speed of the rotary effect p 128 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Transpose JA Ay f A gt n gt egisi x g J S Rhythm J System Quick Guide Solo E Trumpet ower Low Orch OFRE Bass o Exit Controller Effect SplitPoint 2 Touch lt Effect gt The Effect screen appears Effect Rotary Speed Rotary Color Reverb Type Wall Type 3 4 Touch the value setting buttons for Rotary Speed to adjust the setting Effect Rotary Sneed Rotary Reverb Wall Tyr 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to edit the value
304. wer ndear ee ON Orchestral voices 1 Touch lt Sound KBD gt on the Main screen Kia amp Biggest Band f Regis LA gt f Rec Play Se Sta cA Registration Orch Organ Bass a Se 2 Touch either lt Upper gt or lt Lower gt Menu Description Upper To apply chorus to the Upper Orchestral part Lower To apply chorus to the Lower Orchestral part 131 punos y 0 s1294 SnoUe A BulAjddy a re or eS ae TES 3 For the part to which you wish to apply the chorus effect Some voices do not allow the touch the Chorus ON OFF display to change the setting ee nal orus effect to be applied For Each time you touch the Chorus setting it will alternate ON OFF details refer to Voice List Appendix separate booklet Upper Keyboard oa Theater Ens a MEMO You can open the Lower Keyboard screen or Upper Keyboard screen with touching Orch BrassSect 1 ojo 8 Z E Trumpet _o fens lt Lower gt and lt Upper gt Essa S Indication Description ON The Chorus effect will be applied to the voice OFF The Chorus effect will not be applied to the voice 4 Touch lt Exit gt 132 Sa ing Various Effects to the Soun f Applying Various Efecto the Sound Adding Resonance to the Sound Sustain Effect Sustain allows you to add a sustain effect or d
305. y before you edit it p 169 Deleting a Specific Measure Delete Measure You can delete a portion of the performance data This function lets you delete specified measures bars of the song ENEG from all tracks When any part of the song file is deleted subsequent recording will be moved forward to fill the gap Delete Measure Example To delete measures bars 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 a uae Quantize fi1j2 3 4 s5le6 1 Touch lt Rec Play gt on the Main screen The Delete Measure screen appears The Rec Play screen appears Delete Measure Rec Play ATELIER O1 CK lel Bee ye Solo Control geq SOUBWIOLY jedIsnyy uno unpa ooooaca Reset Stop Play Rec Bud Fwd 179 Editing Your Musical Performance Data u 5 Touch the From value the first measure that you wish to delete 6 Touch lt gt lt gt to set From the first measure that you wish to delete Delete Measure 7 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 8 Touch the For value the number of measures that you wish to delete 9 Touch lt gt lt gt to set For the number of measures that you wish to delete To delete to the last measure select ALL 10 When you re done making the settings touch lt Exit gt 1 1 Touch lt Execute gt The following display appears A Delete Measure 0K
306. y puowiueduwosoy jeulbuO Bunea s NTT TTT LAA Creating Original Accompaniment Rhythms Preparations for Creating User Rhythms Displaying the Rhythm Customize Screen Ride Cym 2 1 Touch lt Rhythm gt on the Main screen e Sta BD 2 The Rhythm screen appears gt Rhythm CE fon re E s Z 2 Beat 3 Division Name p 189 2 In the Rhythm screen touch lt o gt Utility EB bution The Utility screen appears 4 Switches the page when the Rhythm pattern is displayed over multiple pages Q ea Zoom Out Zoom In button 5 Expands zooms in and reduces zooms out the Rhythm pattern display Rhythm Name 6 Current location Measure Beat Tick Instrument Name 7 Indicates the name of the instrument used in the Rhythm 8 Rhythm Pattern Display Displays the notes in the selected Rhythm pattern 3 Touch lt Customize gt E utility button 9 Displays the menu with settings for the Rhythm Customize function 10 Preview button Allows you to listen to the created Rhythm 11 al Delete button Deletes the Rhythm in the displayed measure copy Copy button Copies the Rhythm in the displayed measure and adds it to the end of that measure y button 13 When more than eight different instruments are used in a Rhythm press these buttons to switch through the instrument names The Rhythm Customize screen
307. yed Upper Orchestral Sounds marked by B support the Active Expression AEx PipeOrg amp function AEx Theater amp AEx Strings _ M EMO You can also confirm the voice by touching lt Exit gt in the 4 Touch lt g lt J to change screens and touch a voice Others Voice Other Voice select screen You can also name press the key for the part containing a changed voice to 9 Once again press the Others button for the part whose confirm the voice setting sound you wish to set to confirm the voice The indicator of the Others button will change from blinking to lit An active expression voice will be selected 59 Selecting and Playing Sounds UOT TTT UUM AAA Performing with a Human Voice 60 In addition to sounds such as organ and piano you can also play human MEMO voice which produces a vocal like sound For details on the Human Voice that are available refer to i Voice List Appendix Press the Alternate button for the Part for which you wish separa ae to specify a voice to select ON lit or OFF dark The setting of the Alternate button ON lit or OFF dark determines to which of the two available locations a newly selected voice will be assigned Press the Others button for the Part for which you wish to specify a voice The Others Voice screen appears for several seconds Upper Organ When you press the
308. ying Performance Songs from Favorites to USB Memory Coc ccecccecccccccc ccc ccc cece ccc cccees You can copy performance song from Favorites to USB memory In this case touch the arrow icon located in the center of the Song File Copy screen in step 6 of the above procedure so the arrow points upwards In this state you ll be copying performance song from Favorites to USB memory Song File Copy Da j 01 ATELIER 01 v a The rest of the procedure is the same as when copying performance song from USB memory to Favorites 178 Editing Your Musical Performance Data Song files that you record can be edited using five different 2 Inthe Rec Play screen touch lt gt Utility to functions open the Utility screen The following editing functions are provided a Song Select Punch In Out Delete Measure Deleting a Specific Measure p 179 See eee Delete the Recording from a Delete Track p 180 i Track Erase a specified portion of Erase Event the performance in a p 182 specified area py pying i 3 In the Utility screen touch lt Edit gt Quantize Correct Timing Inaccuracies p 185 The Edit Menu screen appears Change the name of the 5 167 performance data Rename Edit Menu Once you edit data it cannot be restored to its original Delete Measure condition As a precaution against accidents we recommend that you save your song to a USB memor
309. ystem gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the Master Tune System Master Tune Mic Echo MIDI IN Mode System Master Iune Mic Ech MIDI My jp cen Tx MIDI 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 415 3Hz 466 2Hz 0 1 Hz units 5 Touch lt Exit gt By touching lt Factory gt you can restore the default setting 440 0 Hz B MEMO Perrys This setting remains stored in memory even while power is leant turned off urna Various Other Settings Adjusting the Mic Echo You can adjust the mic echo that will apply to a connected microphone MEMO Connecting the Microphone p 23 1 Touch lt System gt on the Main screen The System screen appears 2 Touch lt gt lt J gt to display the Mic Echo X System 4 SS pem Master Tune l sma J Soun Mic Echo e MIDI IN Mode d KBD ease a Tx MIDI Ch Upper System T mes E E J Sound KBD Mic Ech i MIDI IN Horeca Rec Play Master Iune Tx MIDI 4 Touch lt gt lt gt to change the setting Setting 0 12 5 Touch lt Exit gt perry This setting remains stored in memory even while power is lam turned off Enabling Transmission of PC Numbers Transmission of PC Program Change numbers can be switched ON OFF when a R

Roland ATELIER AT-500 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents